spreadsheet server - release v14 r4 m177 · spreadsheet server user manual release v14 r4 m177...

Global Software, Inc.'sSpreadsheet Server

User Manual

Release V14 R4 M177

Worldwide Headquarters3201 Beechleaf CourtRaleigh, NC 27604 USA+1.919.872.7800www.globalsoftwareinc.com

EMEA/APAC Headquarters100 Saint Paul's Churchyard London, EC4M 8BU UK+44.203.102.7655

Spreadsheet Server

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the writtenpermission of the publisher.

Microsoft, Excel, Windows, Outlook, Office, Word, Access, and SQL Server are all registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation. IBM, DB2, iSeries and Lotus are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business MachinesCorporation. GroupWise is a registered trademark of Novell. BPCS and INFINIUM are registered trademarks of InforGlobal Solutions in the United States and/or other countries. JACK HENRY trademarks are owned by Jack Henry &Associates, Inc. Lawson and Movex are registered trademarks of Lawson Software, Inc. and its affiliates. Oracle, JDEdwards, and PeopleSoft are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Salesforce is atrademark of salesforce.com, inc. and is used here with permission. SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG. Tradenames referenced are the service marks, trademarks, or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers in theUnited States and/or other countries. Global Software, Inc. is not associated or affiliated in any manner with therespective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks unless expressly stated otherwise. Therespective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks have not endorsed, certified or approvedany of Global Software, Inc.'s products for use in connection with their respective products. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume noresponsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this documentor from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author beliable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectlyby this document.

Printed: September 2014

IContents

© 2014 ... Global Software, Inc.

Table of Contents

Part I Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1

................................................................................................................................... 21 General Ledger Reporting Overview

................................................................................................................................... 32 Query / Query Designer Overview

................................................................................................................................... 43 Distribution Manager Overview

................................................................................................................................... 54 Profile Scheduler Overview

Part II Installation and Registration 6

................................................................................................................................... 61 Additional Components

................................................................................................................................... 92 Register Add-In

................................................................................................................................... 103 Uninstall Process

Part III Navigation 11

................................................................................................................................... 121 SServer Menu

................................................................................................................................... 142 SS Toolbar

................................................................................................................................... 153 SS Ribbon

Part IV Sign On 17

Part V Control Panel 18

Part VI SS Settings 22

Part VII GL Reporting 34

................................................................................................................................... 351 Build a Template

.......................................................................................................................................................... 40Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet

.......................................................................................................................................................... 41Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only

.......................................................................................................................................................... 42Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data

................................................................................................................................... 432 Formula Assistant

................................................................................................................................... 493 GXL Formula for Account Values

................................................................................................................................... 504 Account Segment Syntax

................................................................................................................................... 525 List Accounts for a GXL Formula

................................................................................................................................... 536 Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula

................................................................................................................................... 557 Locate Segment

................................................................................................................................... 578 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists

.......................................................................................................................................................... 57Create/Maintain Segment Lists

.......................................................................................................................................................... 61Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 62SSLDESC Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 63View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel

................................................................................................................................... 649 Calculations

.......................................................................................................................................................... 64Calculation Options

Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177II


.......................................................................................................................................................... 65View/Refresh Local Cache

.......................................................................................................................................................... 66View/Refresh Global Cache

.......................................................................................................................................................... 68Disable/Enable Formula Calculations

................................................................................................................................... 6910 Drill Down Functionality

.......................................................................................................................................................... 69General Grid Features

......................................................................................................................................................... 72Copy/Export Records

.......................................................................................................................................................... 73Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 74Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 75Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 76Drill Down to Journals per Account(s)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 78Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines

.......................................................................................................................................................... 79Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines

.......................................................................................................................................................... 80Drill Down to Subsystem Detail

.......................................................................................................................................................... 81Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc

................................................................................................................................... 8211 Miscellaneous Features

.......................................................................................................................................................... 82List Accounts

.......................................................................................................................................................... 83Account Security

.......................................................................................................................................................... 85SS Validation

.......................................................................................................................................................... 86Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet

.......................................................................................................................................................... 87Expand Detail Reports (GXE)

......................................................................................................................................................... 88Expand to Account Balances

......................................................................................................................................................... 91Expand to Journals

.......................................................................................................................................................... 94Hide Rows with Zero Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 95Reset Host Server Connection

.......................................................................................................................................................... 96SS View Log

.......................................................................................................................................................... 98Upgrade Segment List

.......................................................................................................................................................... 99Upgrade Workbook

................................................................................................................................... 10012 Analyst

.......................................................................................................................................................... 100Analyst Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 102Analyst Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 103Analyst GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 105Analyst GXD

................................................................................................................................... 10613 BPCS

.......................................................................................................................................................... 106BPCS Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 107BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 109BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 111BPCS 6.04+ Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 113BPCS Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 114BPCS GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 116BPCS GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 117BPCS 6+ GSV

.......................................................................................................................................................... 118BPCS GXA

.......................................................................................................................................................... 121BPCS Load Local Data

................................................................................................................................... 12214 Data Warehouse

.......................................................................................................................................................... 122Data Warehouse Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 123Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 124Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 125Data Warehouse GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 127Data Warehouse GXD

................................................................................................................................... 12815 Designer GL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 128Designer GL Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 129Designer GL Ledger Specifics

IIIContents


.......................................................................................................................................................... 131Designer GL Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 132Designer GL GXL

................................................................................................................................... 13416 Infinium

.......................................................................................................................................................... 134Infinium Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 135Infinium Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 136Infinium Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 138Infinium GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 141Infinium GXD

................................................................................................................................... 14217 Jack Henry

.......................................................................................................................................................... 142JH Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 143JH Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 144JH Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 145JH GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 147JH GXD

................................................................................................................................... 14818 JD Edwards

.......................................................................................................................................................... 148JDE Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 149JDE Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 151JDE Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 152JDE Formula Assistant for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 154JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES

.......................................................................................................................................................... 155JDE GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 157JDE GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 159JDE GXSALES

.......................................................................................................................................................... 161JDE GXSALES Drill Down

.......................................................................................................................................................... 162JDE Fixed Asset Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 163JDE FASTR Report Conversion

................................................................................................................................... 16519 Lawson

.......................................................................................................................................................... 165Lawson Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 166Lawson Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 167Lawson GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 169Lawson GXD

................................................................................................................................... 17020 Movex

.......................................................................................................................................................... 170Movex Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 171Movex Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 172Movex Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 173Movex GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 175Movex GXD

................................................................................................................................... 17621 Oracle

.......................................................................................................................................................... 176Oracle Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 178Oracle Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 180Oracle Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 182Oracle GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 184Oracle GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 185Segment Mapping

................................................................................................................................... 18622 PeopleSoft

.......................................................................................................................................................... 186PSoft Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 188PSoft Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 189PSoft Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 190PSoft GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 192PSoft GXD

................................................................................................................................... 19323 SAP

Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177IV


.......................................................................................................................................................... 193SAP Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 194SAP Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 195SAP Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 196SAP GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 199SAP GXD

Part VIII Query 201

................................................................................................................................... 2021 Build a Template for Queries

................................................................................................................................... 2062 Formula Assistant for Queries

................................................................................................................................... 2113 GEXQ Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2144 GEXD Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 217GEXD Targeting a Cell

.......................................................................................................................................................... 219GEXD Targeting a Range

.......................................................................................................................................................... 221GEXD Targeting a Table

................................................................................................................................... 2235 GEXS Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 226Explore

................................................................................................................................... 2276 GEXI Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2307 Download Queries from Query Exchange

Part IX Query Designer 232

................................................................................................................................... 2321 Query Designer Architecture

.......................................................................................................................................................... 233Ribbon Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 236Explorer File System Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 237Query Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 238Query View Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 239Table Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 240Parameters Panel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 241Field List Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 242Field List Menu

......................................................................................................................................................... 243Builder Panel

......................................................................................................................................... 246Custom Buttons

.......................................................................................................................................................... 247SQL Text Panel

................................................................................................................................... 2482 QD Settings

................................................................................................................................... 2513 Connections

.......................................................................................................................................................... 252Update Query Connections

................................................................................................................................... 2534 Create a New Query

................................................................................................................................... 2545 Save the Query for the First Time

................................................................................................................................... 2556 Add Tables

................................................................................................................................... 2577 Create Relationships

................................................................................................................................... 2598 Select or Create Query Fields

.......................................................................................................................................................... 260Fields Used Direct from Source Table

.......................................................................................................................................................... 261Assign Aliases to Fields

.......................................................................................................................................................... 263Create/Edit Calculated Fields

......................................................................................................................................................... 264Select Fields from a Table

......................................................................................................................................................... 266Create Date Fields

......................................................................................................................................................... 268Use the CASE Builder

......................................................................................................................................................... 273GEXD Row

......................................................................................................................................................... 275Get Values

VContents


................................................................................................................................... 2779 Add Criteria

.......................................................................................................................................................... 277Hard Coded Criteria

.......................................................................................................................................................... 278Create and Use Parameters

......................................................................................................................................................... 278Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel

......................................................................................................................................................... 279Standard Parameters in the Query Designer

......................................................................................................................................................... 281Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules

......................................................................................................................................................... 282Smart Parms in the Query Designer

......................................................................................................................................................... 284Parameters in Excel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 285Sub Query Column

.......................................................................................................................................................... 287Assign Query

.......................................................................................................................................................... 288GEXD Limit

................................................................................................................................... 28910 Create a Totals Query

................................................................................................................................... 29111 Create the GEXQ Field

................................................................................................................................... 29212 SQL SHELL Function

................................................................................................................................... 29313 Execute Query

................................................................................................................................... 29414 Legacy Ad Hoc Queries

................................................................................................................................... 29515 Query Management

.......................................................................................................................................................... 296Download or Publish Query Exchange Queries

.......................................................................................................................................................... 297Textual Query Definition

................................................................................................................................... 29916 QD View Log

Part X Distribution Manager 300

................................................................................................................................... 3001 DM Navigation

.......................................................................................................................................................... 301DistMgr Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 302DM Toolbar

.......................................................................................................................................................... 303DM Ribbon

................................................................................................................................... 3042 DM Settings

................................................................................................................................... 3083 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet

................................................................................................................................... 3164 Add Specification Rows

................................................................................................................................... 3175 Maintain Specification Rows

................................................................................................................................... 3186 Distribute Specifications

................................................................................................................................... 3197 Miscellaneous DM Items

.......................................................................................................................................................... 319Merge Data

.......................................................................................................................................................... 321Cache Address Book

.......................................................................................................................................................... 322Local Address List

.......................................................................................................................................................... 323DM View Log

Part XI Profile Scheduler 325

................................................................................................................................... 3271 Address Book Cache

................................................................................................................................... 3282 Distribution Manager Profile

................................................................................................................................... 3313 Load Local INF

................................................................................................................................... 3344 Load Local JDE

................................................................................................................................... 3375 Schedule Profile Task

................................................................................................................................... 3406 Define Mapped Drives

................................................................................................................................... 3417 Miscellaneous PS Items

Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M177VI


.......................................................................................................................................................... 341PS View Log

.......................................................................................................................................................... 343Database Management

Index 344

Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1

Global Software, Inc.

1 Spreadsheet Server Introduction

backbone of Global Software, Inc.'s Microsoft® Excel-based Automation Roadmap that allows organizations to gain live

and dynamic access from their respective ERP or relational database from within Excel® to data such as: GL, AP, AR,PO, Inventory, Manufacturing, Rent Roll, Sales, Projects, Time & Attendance information and more…

Spreadsheet Server converts Excel into a tightly integrated analytical tool for any ERP system. Users can leverage thestrength of their spreadsheets with seamless dynamic integration to their information, along with powerful drill-downcapability to the lowest level of detail. It allows users to build a range of reports from simple ad hoc workbooks tocomplex dashboard-type views of critical business data. Spreadsheet Server eliminates the re-keying or downloadingof data into the spreadsheet and makes the spreadsheet an integral part of the application.

While maintaining the full functionality of their Excel spreadsheet application, Spreadsheet Server allows the user tomix GL and Non-GL data in a single worksheet. The combination of powerful spreadsheet functions (charting, graphing,text formatting and sorting) and dynamic information provides the basics for building accurate, elegant incomestatements, balance sheets, and other critical statements.

Spreadsheet Server Components The Spreadsheet Server application consists of four components:

Excel Add–In for Financial Reporting across ERP platforms -- Spreadsheet Server formulas used in Excel allowusers to create reports using familiar business and accounting terms, not technical specifications. Query Designer -- A user friendly tool which enables users to design and maintain queries over any relationaldatabase. These queries can be combined with pre-configured formulas in a single Excel spreadsheet. Query Exchange -- An online repository of queries from which the user may download selected queries to the Query

pre–configured queries together. Distribution Manager -- Eliminating the time-consuming tasks of printing, copying, or creating email attachmentsjust to get information to your end-users, this tool automates the scheduling of report distribution from directly withinExcel. Profile Scheduler -- This component allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manageraddress book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files.

Spreadsheet Server Licensed Features Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user.

General Ledger -- access to General Ledger related formulas in the Excel Add-in component.Query -- access to query related formulas in the Excel Add-In component and access to Query Exchange.Query Designer -- access to the Query Designer and Query Exchange components.Distribution Manager -- access to the Distribution Manager component.Limited Licensing -- restricts access to various Spreadsheet Server features (i.e. Build a Template, FormulaAssistant, Segment Lists, Locate Segment, List Accounts, Data Validation, and Upgrade Workbook).

Spreadsheet Server - Release V14 R4 M1772

1.1 General Ledger Reporting Overview

The General Ledger (GL) Reporting feature of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server converts familiar spreadsheetsoftware (Excel) into a tightly integrated analytical tool for financial systems. Spreadsheet Server uses specificformulas to retrieve General Ledger data on the spreadsheet, and gives the user the ability to drill-down to detail.

Features (*)Retrieve dynamic balances based on ledger specific formats and time periods (Period, Quarter, Year-to-Date, etc.)Retrieve balances using single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ fieldRetrieve account descriptionsDrill down to detailed account balancesDrill down to journal detail for selected accountsDrill down to journal lines for a selected journal entryDrill down to subsystem detail for a selected journal entryCopy drill down data and paste into spreadsheets or other documents

(*) Available features vary based upon the selected ledger being processed.

BenefitsLeverage spreadsheet skills and write reports within minutesEliminate requirement for IT or super-users to create/change financial reportsNo more downloading or re-keying of spreadsheet dataReduce number of days to close financial books; save just 3 hours per month per user and the investment is paid forin less than 12 months Publish executive-quality reports from current spreadsheet softwareIncrease the efficiency and timeliness of the budgeting processBuild a complete Executive Information SystemCreate ad hoc reports or perform account analysis within minutesSave financial user's time by combining reporting, account inquiry, and journal inquiry into one application; free uptime for true business analysisPerform corporate consolidations with instant access to dynamic dataReduce external audit time by allowing easier, instant access to financial data with full drill down capabilitiesReconcile accountsPrint or email spreadsheets quickly and easily from a single, central application



1.2 Query / Query Designer Overview

As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Query Designer allows users to build queries whichare then used in Excel to seamlessly retrieve critical business data and return the data for use within a spreadsheet.

When using queries in Spreadsheet Server, three components work in conjunction with each other:Query Designer, a visual tool, is used to design and maintain queries. Query Exchange, an online depository of queries, is used to download selected queries to the Query Designer andthen utilize them in Excel.The Excel Add-In component allows the user to execute the Query Designer queries on a spreadsheet, returningdynamic business data.

Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user.

Features and BenefitsRetrieve dynamic data within the company's enterprise databases (including Microsoft® Access, DSN systemdatabases, IBM® iSeries , Oracle®, Salesforce®, SAP® and Microsoft® SQL Server)Build a query using system provided designer toolImport/export pre-configured queries from various sources, including Global's Query ExchangeExecute a query on the fly to ensure data is presented as business needs dictateSimple file system for storing and listing queries in a tree structure, similar to Windows® ExplorerUse data from a spreadsheet as parameters for a queryEasily create formulas in spreadsheets using system provided Build a Template and Formula AssistantPerform dynamic calculations with multi-level drill downs to view associated detailCopy and paste drill down data into spreadsheets


1.3 Distribution Manager Overview

As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Distribution Manager is a powerful tool used toautomate document distribution via email, print, or file archive.

Distributing spreadsheets can be a very time-consuming and laborious task. Consider the following issues: A workbook has many worksheets but only select ones are to be distributed. A workbook has external references to other workbooks needed for calculating the proper figures, but linked sheetsare not to be distributed.Worksheets to be distributed contain formulas derived from a specific Excel add-in (such as Spreadsheet Server) orfrom a special Excel macro. The recipients do not have the add-in or macro installed on their PC.Workbooks need to be encrypted to allow/disallow opening or altering of contents.Hours are spent organizing, assembling, calculating, copying and pasting worksheets every reporting cycle.

Distribution Manager takes into account each of the above issues and provides users with an easy and time-savingsolution.

Distribution Manager assembles Distribution Controls directly in workbooks. The number of distribution entries islimited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. Once the distribution rows are created, users can visually seeand manage "who gets what" from one worksheet.



1.4 Profile Scheduler Overview

The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching theDistribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loadinglocal database files.

Available Profile Types:Address Book Cache - caches the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the timerequired to load the email address book.Distribution Manager - refreshes selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or distributes selectedDistribution Manager workbooks.Load Local Database Files - downloads account balance information into local databases allowing for optimizedcalculation speeds. This is an excellent option for producing Spreadsheet Server reports once books have beenclosed and the analytical tasks have been performed in real time. The time spent loading the local databases isgreatly offset by the dramatically reduced spreadsheet calculation times.

As Profile Scheduler works with the Microsoft Windows Task Scheduler, reference the chart below for required userright assignments:

Profile Type Creating andmanually running aProfile

Scheduling aProfile

Running ascheduled Profilewhile logged on

Running ascheduled Profilewhile logged off-OR- while loggedon and running aProfile underanother accountother than thelogged on account

Address Book Cache No specialrequirements

No specialrequirements



Distribution Manager No specialrequirements

AdministratorPrivileges

AdministratorPrivileges

User security musthave the "Run asBatch" policy added(see Note below)

Load Local No specialrequirements




Note:To verify if a user is part of the Administrator group, from the desktop go to Control Panel>AdministrativeTools>Computer Management. On the Computer Management panel in the tree view go to Local Users andGroups>Groups. Select Administrator and view the properties. Verify that the user is in the group or add the userto the group if necessary.To verify a user's security, from the desktop go to Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Local Security Policy. Onthe Local Security Policy panel in the tree view to go Local Policies>User Rights Assignment. From the list ofpolicies, select "Log on as a batch job" and view the properties. Verify that the user is part of the policy group oradd the user if necessary. If missing, Profile Scheduler will try to add the privilege for the user when saving theprofile. Mapped drives used in any part of the Profile Scheduler process, including Distribution Manager (i.e. File SaveFolder) or Spreadsheet Server (i.e. File Locations), must be defined on the Mapped Drives tab when running andscheduling certain profile types.


2 Installation and Registration

2.1 Additional Components

REQUIRED COMPONENTS

Application ConfiguratorA single installation of the Application Configurator for Spreadsheet Server must be completed by the administrator, andeach user must be established and assigned a valid license key in the Configurator prior to using Spreadsheet Server. Contact the security administrator for the network location of the security and connections file.

Microsoft® .Net FrameworkMicrosoft .Net Framework 4.0 is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. This component must be installed prior torunning the Spreadsheet Server setup program.

Microsoft® Visual Studio Tools for OfficeMicrosoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed,then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install.

Microsoft® Access Database Engine 2010Microsoft Access Database Engine for 2010 Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is notinstalled, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install.

Microsoft® Visual C++ 2010Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then theSpreadsheet Server setup program will force the install.

OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using DISTRIBUTION MANAGER

Distributor Outlook Add-InFor Excel 2010 (or above) users utilizing Outlook, Distributor Outlook Add-In is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of Distributor Outlook Add-In prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft® Outlook Exchange as the Email Server option.

Microsoft® Collaboration Data Objects For Excel 2007 users utilizing Outlook, Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects (alias CDO) is a prerequisite forDistribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation ofCDO prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Email Server option.

OPTIONAL COMPONENTSBased upon the database type to which Spreadsheet Server and/or Query Designer is connecting to, additionalsoftware components may be required prior to processing. Contact your IT department to determine what is required tobe installed.

Microsoft® Access DatabaseNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Access database (.mdb) file.

Data Source Name (DSN) DatabaseFrom the desktop, select Start>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Data Sources (ODBC) to create the DSN.

Installation and Registration 7


iSeries DB2® Database

Both the ODBC and the OLEDB Provider components of the IBM® iSeries Access for Windows® (formerly named

Client Access Express) must be installed onto each user's PC. Run the setup program within IBM iSeries Access forWindows to determine that the ODBC and OLEDB Provider components are installed.

Oracle® ClientNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Oracle database, as Global provides a directconnection. However, if you desire to connect to the Oracle database via the Oracle Client ODBC provider, then theOracle Client software must be installed on each user's PC. Within Oracle Client configure the local service name, andassign the appropriate host name and port number.

SAP® Database


To access a SAP database using the GL Reporting feature, SAP R3 Version 4.7 or higher is required (note that bothversions handle Unicode and Non-Unicode). However, to access a SAP database using the Query and Query Designerfeatures, SAP Netweaver 7.0 or higher must be installed on each PC.

Disk space requirements on the server are negligible (less than 10 Meg).The SAP adapter is imported to the system via an SAP transport in the "/ZGLBSOFT/" reserved namespace. This isan SAP approved mechanism for third party software which ensures no standard/custom code is overwritten on thecustomer system.No additional servers or server hardware is required.

Microsoft® SQL Server DatabaseNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to a SQL Server database, as the ODBC driver used isalready loaded with Windows®.

Installation and Registration 9


2.2 Register Add-In

During the install process the system automatically registers and initiates the Spreadsheet Server add-in for Excel. Iffor any reason Spreadsheet Server is not registered during installation, then it must be manually registered. In addition,if multiple users are using Spreadsheet Server on the same PC, then subsequent users must manually register theadd-in. The registration process registers and initiates the add-in for Excel.

Note: If the add-in is not registered on the PC, then Spreadsheet Server will not appear in the list of available add-insfor Excel.

1. From the desktop, click Start>All Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Register Add-In. The RegisterSpreadsheet Server Add-In panel appears.

2. Click OK to register the add-in. A panel appears indicating that the registration process is complete.

3. Click OK.


2.3 Uninstall Process

Generally it is not necessary to uninstall Spreadsheet Server prior to installing new versions. An uninstall should onlybe performed in order to completely remove the product from the PC.

1. Ensure that Excel is not open.

2. From the desktop, click Start>Control Panel>Add or Remove Programs, -or- Programs and Features.

3. Select the Spreadsheet Server program and click Change/Remove -or- Uninstall.

Navigation 11


3 Navigation

Spreadsheet Server uses the following navigation methods for processing functions on an Excel spreadsheet. Eachfunction is not always available from each method.

SServer Menu (see SServer Menu)Spreadsheet Server Toolbar (see SS Toolbar)Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon)

NAVIGATION TIPS:Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various pathsavailable to access a function.


3.1 SServer Menu

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, the SServer menu is added to Excel. TheSServer menu is used to access/process various functions within the application.

Note: For Excel 2003, the SServer menu is accessible from the Excel menu bar. For Excel 2007 (and above), the SServer menu is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon.

Menu Item Description

Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell: Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which makeup the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balancesand Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances).Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specifiedquery (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula).Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query(see GEXS Formula).

List Accounts Opens the List Accounts panel, listing the accounts used in the GXLformula (see List Accounts for a GXL Formula) or allowing the user togenerate a list of existing accounts (see List Accounts).

Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid values, @ fieldsor hierarchy values for each account segment (see Locate Segment).

View Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cachedrecords (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache).

Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria tocontrol processing (see SS Settings).

Navigation 13



Hide Rows with Zero Balances Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the netresult is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances).

Restore Hidden Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with ZeroBalances).

Generate Account Detail ForCurrent Sheet

Opens the Generate Account Detail Options panel, allowing the user tocreate an audit trail listing the individual accounts and balances included inthe GXL formulas on the worksheet (see Generate Account Detail forCurrent Sheet).

Generate All Detail Reports(GXE)

Generates detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook (see Expandto Account Balances and Expand to Journals).

Generate All Detail Reports(GEXD)

Executes all GEXD formulas in the workbook (see GEXD Formula).

Clear Cache and Recalculate /Recalculate

Clears and recalculates the local cache or recalculates the global cache(see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache).

Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintainparameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant forQueries.

Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create atemplate on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template forQueries.

Refresh Queries Refreshes query data from Query Designer. Query data should berefreshed prior to using a new or modified query in Excel.

Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the .xla in the workbook.

Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook torevised Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Upgrade Workbook).

Disconnect All OpenConnections

Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries.

Disable Spreadsheet Server Closes the connection and disables Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Disable / Enable Spreadsheet Server Formula Calculations).


3.2 SS Toolbar

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Spreadsheet Server (SS) toolbar is added toExcel. The SS toolbar may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in the application.

Note: For Excel 2003, the SS toolbar is accessible in the standard toolbar section. For Excel 2007 (and above), the SS toolbar is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon.


For Oracle ledgers only, identifies the default ledger for GXL formulas,unless the value is overridden in the formula. Upon signing ontoSpreadsheet Server, the ledger defaults the value assigned in the user'ssettings (see Oracle Ledger Specifics). Click the down arrow and selectfrom a list of available ledgers.

Formula AssistantOpens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintainparameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant forQueries.

Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validationlist for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation).

Clear Cache andRecalculate / Recalculate

Clears and recalculates the local cache or recalculates the global cache(see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache).

Drill DownBased upon the formula in the current active cell:

Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which makeup the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balancesand Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances).Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specifiedquery (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula).Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query(see GEXS Formula).

Hide Zero LinesHides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the netresult is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances).

Unhide Zero LinesDisplays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with ZeroBalances).

Segment ListsOpens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to createand/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

SettingsOpens the Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria tocontrol processing (see SS Settings).

Closes the connection and disables Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Disable / Enable Spreadsheet Server Formula Calculations).

Navigation 15


3.3 SS Ribbon

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon isadded for Excel 2007 (and above). The SS ribbon may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process variousfunctions in the application.

Note: For Excel 2003, the SS ribbon is NOT applicable. If the SS ribbon does not appear, go to Settings and click the Add Excel Ribbon button (see SS Settings).


Recalc Recalculates all formulas in the workbook. Click the down arrow toaccess additional functions (i.e. recalculate formulas for workbook,worksheet or selection, refresh queries, etc.).

Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cachedrecords (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. list cacherecords, clear the cache and recalculate -or- recalculate). Note: When using Local Cache, the Cache icon will be yellow. Whenusing Global Cache, the Cache icon will be red when items are pendingand green when all items are calculated/completed.

Generate Reports Generates detail reports for all GXE and GEXD formulas in the workbook(see Expand to Account Balances, Expand to Journals, and GEXDFormula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. all orselected GXEs, account detail report (see Generate Account Detail forCurrent Sheet), all or selected GEXDs.

Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell and the default actionassigned for the Drill Down button in the user's settings:

Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying account balanceswhich make up the calculated GXL amount(s) (see Drill Down to DetailedAccount Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances).Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying detail records forthe specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula).Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query(see GEXS Formula).

Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. drill down to panelor worksheet options (see Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) and DrillDown to Selected Ad Hoc), summary drill down (see Drill Down toSummarized Account Balances) and related summary drill down options).

Hide Rows Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the netresult is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click thedown arrow to access additional functions (i.e. hide zero rows forworksheet or workbook).



Restore Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with ZeroBalances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e.restore hidden zero rows for worksheet or workbook).

Expand GL Row Expands the balances for the selected GXL formulas on a row into accountdetails (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the downarrow to access additional functions (i.e. expand row or all rows).

Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to accessadditional functions (i.e. collapse row, or all rows on the worksheet or inthe workbook).

Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintainparameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant forQueries.

Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create atemplate on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template forQueries.

Explore Opens the Select Item panel with the values returned from the specifiedquery, allowing the user to select values to be returned to the spreadsheet(see Explore).

Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to createand/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid values, @ fieldsor hierarchy values for each account segment (see Locate Segment).

Tools:

Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validationlist for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation).

Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the .xla in the workbook.

Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook torevised Spreadsheet Server formulas (see Upgrade Workbook).


Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries.

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy logentries, and email or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Click the downarrow to access additional functions (i.e. view log, clear log, or turnenhanced logging on/off).


Enabled / Disabled Displays the current status. Click to toggle -orclick the down arrow toaccess individual Enable and Disable options (see Sign on).

Sign On 17


4 Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SSRibbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box.

4. Click Login or OK.

Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information:

Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle

BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft

BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP

BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex


5 Control Panel

The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel is a central panel from which multiple functions can be accessed from outsidethe standard Excel interface. These same functions may also be accessed from the Spreadsheet Server menu,toolbar or ribbon within Excel. For example, from the Control Panel:

GL reporting users may view account balances for a selected account string, and may subsequently drill down to thejournals and journal entry lines which make up the balance. Query users may view the results of an GEXQ formula, and may also drill down to supporting detail.

To Access the Control Panel:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Spreadsheet Server Control Panel.

The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.






2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, then click Login or OK. The Spreadsheet ServerControl Panel appears.

Control Panel 19


3. Some of the fields on the GL Balances tab will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing isthe same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel -GL Balances tab, or to access other functions. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledgerspecific GXL information.

Field Description

Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type

Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type

Year Specify the reporting year.

Format Displays PER, indicating the time range for which to retrieve data.

Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number,or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger(a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts

Designer GL Definition Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Account String Key the value for each segment in the account string for the GXL formulaor click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Segments will vary based upon the selected ledger. Values may be singlevalue, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (seeAccount Segment Syntax).

GL Balances 0 - 15 Displays the calculated period balances for the selected account string.

Function Description

Generate - GXL Calculates period balances for the selected account string, andsubsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting journals.


Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/ormaintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security).


Help Accesses the online user manual.

Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information:






4. To display balances for the account string, from the ribbon select Generate. Balances are displayed in Period 0 to15 fields.

5. To view account balances, click the corresponding Drill button ( ). The Drill Down panel appears (see Drill Downto Detailed Account Balances).

6. Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel - Query tab, or to access other functions.

Field Description

Query Name When the query resides in the File System, click the Open From File

button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed.When the query resides in Query Exchange, click the Search Online

button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed (seeDownload Queries from Query Exchange).

Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click thedown arrow and select the field to be summarized.Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list.

Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click thedown arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX).

Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have beenspecified in the selected query definition.

Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula.

Control Panel 21


Field Description

Value Specify the value (i.e. single value, a wildcard, list, range, or segment list)to be used when generating the query results.

Results Displays the calculated value for the selected query.


Generate - GEXQ Calculates a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query inthe Results field, and subsequently allows for drilling down to thesupporting detail (see GEXQ Formulas).



Help Accesses the online user manual.

7. To display the result for the specified query, from the ribbon select Generate. The calculated value displays in theResults field.

8. To view supporting detail, click the corresponding Drill button ( ). The Drill Down panel appears (see GEXQFormulas).


6 SS Settings

Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of theoptions define processing for all users on the PC; however, various options (auto-start, display tooltips, enhancedlogging, and expand rows) are defined for each individual user. Settings for General Ledger Type, and Segment Lists,Ad Hocs Queries, Designer GL Definitions and EDQ Files locations may be set and/or overridden based uponparameters defined in Application Settings in the Configurator.

Note: Various Settings panels are conditional and based upon the user's licensed features.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Settings. The Settings - General panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel -or- by selectingthe toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

SS Settings 23


2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

General Options:

General Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the General Ledger type being used. When not licensed to use the General Ledger feature, the value is set to"None." Note: After a selection is made, the system automatically navigates to theassociated ledger specific panel.

Label Language Click the down arrow and select the language to be used to display labelson various panels (only applies to Build a Template, Formula Assistant,SServer Menu, SS Ribbon, and right click context menu).

Connection Options:

iSeries/DSN/SQLServer/Oracle Specify the connection protocol to be used to connect to the host system.

Network Security &Connections Files

Key the path or use the Browse button to select the location of theSecurity and Connections File as specified in the Configurator. Thisfunction is password protected.Note: When in demo mode, select the desired security and connectionsfile in order to switch to standard mode.

Available Environments Specify the environment to be used for processing. This section onlyappears when the Network Security and Connection Files location is onthe network and an available training environment exists.

Standard Options:

Start Automatically WhenExcel Starts

If selected, Spreadsheet Server automatically starts each time Excel isstarted. Otherwise, Spreadsheet Server must be manually started eachtime Excel is started.

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see SS View Log).Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, email or clear the log file.

Override List Separator With Specify the character to use to as the list separator in Excel formulas. Generally this value should be a comma unless using different regionalsettings. Contact Global for more information.

SQL Timeout Specify the maximum time allowed for a query to run on the host system.

Delimiter for Separating From/To Values in a Range

Specify the delimiter for separating from/to values in a range. This defaultsto a period and should only be changed if periods exist within the accountsegment values.

Display Tooltips If selected, tooltips display on various Spreadsheet Server panels (onlyapplies to Settings, Build a Template and Formula Assistant).

Disable SS KeyboardShortcuts

If selected, all Spreadsheet Server keyboard shortcuts are disabled.

Drill Down Options:

Drill Down Specify when displaying drill down results on a panel whether to use asingle dialog panel per drill down or whether subsequent drill downs appearon a different tab within the same panel.


Field Description

SSRibbon Drill Down ButtonDefault Action

Specify whether the Drill Down button on the SSRibbon displays results ona panel or pushes results to a worksheet.

Drill Down to Worksheet GoesTo

Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to create anew worksheet each time or to reuse the same drill down worksheet.

Drill Down to Worksheet DataGoes To

Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to placethe drill down down in a table, range or cell.

Cache:

Cache Type Click the down arrow and select whether to use Local, Global Cache, orGlobal Cache with Redis Technology. Additional options are availablebased upon the cache type selected. (see View/Refresh Local Cache orView/Refresh Global Cache).Note: Additional component(s) must be installed to implement either theGlobal Cache or Global Cache with Redis Technology options. ContactGlobal for more information.

Global Cache URL Specify the URL for the global cache.

Redis Server / Database ID /Password

Specify the server, database ID and password associated with the Redisdatabase.

Use Shared Cache If selected, shared user data in the cache is used for processing. If notselected, cache records generated by the user are used for processingand user security remains intact.

Auto Refresh Pending Items If selected, any items in the cache which are pending will refresh andcontinue to process. If not selected, any formulas which were pending willcontinue to display 'Pending' in the workbook until manually refreshed tobring in a value.

Button Function

Demo Allows the user to switch from standard to demo mode. The button onlyappears when the user is in standard mode.

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy logentries, and email or clear the log file (see SS View Log).

Maintain Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to createand/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

Add Excel Ribbon Registers and adds the SS ribbon in Excel. The button only appears whenthe ribbon is not currently registered for an Excel 2007 or above user.

SS Settings 25


3. Use the table to enter data on the GL Reporting panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

GL Reporting Options:

Drill Down: Include ZeroBalance Accounts with Activity

If selected, accounts with activity but zero balances are included on theaccount balances drill down panel, and in the expand row and GXE results.

Summary Drill Down: Promptfor Processing Criteria

If selected, a prompt panel appears when the Summary Drill Down functionis selected allowing the user to define processing criteria; otherwise,default selection criteria is used.

GXL: Insert Trailing Dash If selected, a dash is appended at the end of the account string.

Template: Default Currency Specify the currency value to default when using Build a Template.

GXE: Last Processing Column Specify the last column GXE formulas will process.

Delimiter for SeparatingAccount Segments

Specify the delimiter for separating account segments.

Expand GL Row FunctionExpands Detail Rows

Specify whether the Expand GL Row function expands detail rows up ordown.


Button Function

Maintain Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/ormaintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security).

Refresh Cached Segment Values Refreshes cached GL account segment values.

4. Ledger Specific panels are used to maintain criteria specific to the ledger. Use the following links to access ledgerspecific settings information.

Analyst (N/A) Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle


BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP


SS Settings 27


5. Use the table to enter data on the Quarters panel.

Field Description

Accounting Quarter Periods Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each of the four quarters.


6. Use the table to enter data on the Ad Hoc Queries panel.

Field Description

Ad Hoc Queries:

Filter by GL If selected, only ad hoc queries associated with the selected ledger arelisted on the panel and are included in the list of ad hoc queries in the drilldown feature. De-select to list all available ad hoc queries.

SQL is Read Only If selected, ad hoc queries may not be created, edited, copied or deleted. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information.

Button Function

Test Runs the selected ad hoc query and displays the results in a Drill Downpanel.

SS Settings 29


7. Use the table to enter data on the Query panel.

Field Description

Query Options:

Limit GEXD to 64K Rows/Sheet

If selected, the output of a GEXD formula is limited to 64,000 rows persheet and the query terminates when the output exceeds the limit. Note: For Excel 2003 and prior users, it is suggested to select this option. For Excel 2007 (.xlsx) users, it is suggested to not select this option totake advantage of the more than a million rows available.

Query Timeout Specify the desired timeout limit for query process time.


8. The File Locations panel displays the location of various files used in the product. File locations which arehighlighted have been preloaded based upon settings in the Configurator. Use the table to enter data on the FileLocations panel.

Field Description

File Locations:

Shared Documents For Administrators in Citrix environments only, use the Browse buttonto select the location to which to move the basic folders. This function ispassword protected. Contact Global for more information.

Segment Lists Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theSegment Lists database and Segment Mapping objects. This may be alocal or network drive.

Local Cache Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the localcache database.

Ad Hoc Queries Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the adhoc queries, this folder should be reserved for ad hoc queries only.

PC Local Database For BPCS and Data Warehouse ledgers only, key the path or use theBrowse button to specify the location of the local .mbd database. Thislocation may also be updated from the Load Local PC Database or theLoad Data Warehouse from GL panels.

SS Settings 31


Field Description

Budget Manager Balances For BPCS, Infinium and JDE ledgers only, key the path or use the Browsebutton to specify the location of the budget balances when using Global'sBudget Manager application.

Designer GL Definitions Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theDesigner GL definitions.

Drill Down Layouts Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the user-defined drill down grid layouts.

EDQ Files Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the EDQquery files.

9. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Spreadsheet Server. Toemail this information to the helpdesk, click the Email button. The system opens a new Outlook® email panel withthe contents of this panel in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body asnecessary and click the Send button.


10. The Performance panel displays various performance counts and statistics with respect to how the product isprocessing. Use the table to enter data on the Performance panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

SQL Execution Threshold Specify the time limit (in seconds) for which to create an entry in the errorlog when a SQL statement exceeds the threshold specified.

Button Function

Reset Statistics Clears the performance statistic values, thus allowing counts and statisticsto start accumulating again.

Email Opens a new Outlook® email panel with system information andperformance data in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary and click the Send button.

SS Settings 33


11. The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online usermanual.

12. Click OK. The system writes the changes made on the current panel and closes the panel.


7 GL Reporting

Spreadsheet Server retrieves financial data from the General Ledger into Excel using the following formulas:

Formula Description

GXL Returns an account balance (see GXL Formula for Account Values and see links below toaccess ledger specific GXL information).

GXD Returns an account segment or account string description (see links below to access ledgerspecific GXD information).

GXE Explodes summary data line into detail data lines (see Expand to Account Balances andExpand to Journals).

GXC Customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of new formulas.

SSLDESC Returns a segment list description (see SSLDESC Formula).

GXSALES For JDE ledgers only, returns sales totals based upon sales criteria (see JDE GXSALES).

Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See Query for query related formulas.

These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions.

Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (seeFormula Assistant).






Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information:


BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft



GL Reporting 35


7.1 Build a Template

Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This toolpopulates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters and account segment values as provided by theuser. The tool inserts a GXL or GXE formula using the parameters and account segment values.

Note: Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. See Build aTemplate for Queries for query related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the lastused formula.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+B -or- by selecting the ribbon equivalent (seeSS Ribbon).

2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears.


3. Some fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basicprocessing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Build a Template -GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXLinformation.

Field Description

GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for AccountValues).

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet name which will receive thetemplate.



Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year.

Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however,some ledgers may have other valid formats.


Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger(a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts

Ledger Specific ProcessingOptions

These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - FSG Templates and Convert Missing Valuesto Parent Hierarchies

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template.

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template.

Available Designer GLDefinitions

Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Line Description Specify a description for the account or group of accounts specified.

Clear Worksheet / Do Not Clear Worksheet / Shift Worksheet Data

Specify when inserting data whether to clear all cell data on the targetworksheet, to not clear cell data on the target worksheet, or to insert theGXL formula in the target cell and then to insert the ledger and segmentspecific data to newly inserted columns and rows to the top and to the leftof the existing worksheet data (see Build a Template GXL Using Clear / DoNot Clear Worksheet and Build a Template GXL Using Shift WorksheetData).

Insert Column Data Only This option is enabled after data has been inserted using the Insert icon onthe toolbar. If selected, an additional column of parameters is inserted(see Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only).

Skip a Row If selected, an additional row is inserted between the last columnparameter and the account segment title row.

Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed.

GL Reporting 37


Field Description

Account Segments: If necessary, use the scroll bar to access additional account segments.

Display/Use If selected, the account segment is included in the formula.Note: Segments may only be excluded from the bottom up.

Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determinesif the account segment will be located in the template parameters columnor by default, on the template account segment row.

Description Specify the description to be used as the account segment title.

Value Specify the value to default on the template for the account segment orclick the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Thevalue may be a single value, mask, segment list, hierarchy value, @ fieldor the first value in a range (see Account Segment Syntax).

Range Thru Value If applicable, select the check box and specify the ending range value forthe account segment.

Use the following links to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information:






4. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GXE panel.

Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing forboth account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula.

Field Description

GXE: Fills detail account balances or journal details into the specified worksheet(see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals).

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template.

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template

Source Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the worksheet that containsthe summary formulas to be expanded and onto which to insert the GXEformula.

Target Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the new or existing worksheetthat contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expandeddetail.

Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas.

Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheetto begin inserting the expanded detail.

Headings Click the down arrow and select whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Autofit Click the down arrow and select whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Clear Sheet Click the down arrow and select whether or not to clear the targetworksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified forthe Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand toJournals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, click the down arrow and select the ad hoc query to be used togenerate journal detail.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hocquery is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and DesignerGL ledgers.

Filter by GL If selected, the queries listed in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down listare limited to the ledger specified in the associated field. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

GL for Filtering (no label) If the Filter by GL option is selected, click the down arrow and select theledger for which to list ad hoc queries in the Journals Ad Hoc Query dropdown list.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

GL Reporting 39


Field Description

Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used forsummarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String= Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balancesat the account level enter '3' (third account segment).

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or fieldname (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDEGXECC formula.

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated atthe selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String =Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third accountsegment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company andgrand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, orDesigner GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number ofsegments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the front ofthe account string. This will need to be taken into consideration whenspecifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals.

Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journalentry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system createsa new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the nextavailable standard Excel table name. The table includes headers andgrand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option isignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level isnot blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

5. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values, and the formula to the selected worksheet, incrementsPeriod and Starting Column/Row values for the next GXL formula, and keeps the panel open for additionalinserts.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes thepanel.Cancel/Close (button) -- closes the panel.


7.1.1 Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet

The following example demonstrates using the Clear Worksheet and/or the Do Not Clear Worksheet options whenprocessing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function.

1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build aTemplate panel appears.

2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data.

3. Click the Insert button at the bottom of the panel. The panel closes and the template is generated.

GL Reporting 41


7.1.2 Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only

The following example demonstrates using the Insert Column Data Only option when processing a GXL formula fromthe Build a Template function. This option is used to insert multiple columns onto a single worksheet.

1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build aTemplate panel appears.

2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data.

3. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The template is generated, but the panel remains open and the Period,Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented, and the Insert Column Data Only check box isselected.

4. Key any necessary changes to the ledger parameters.

5. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The column data and GXL formula are added to the template, and the Period,Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired columns are added.

7. Click the Close button to close the panel.


7.1.3 Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data

The following example demonstrates using the Shift Worksheet Data option when processing a GXL formula from theBuild a Template function. This option is used to insert the required rows and columns used for a GXL formula into anexisting non-Spreadsheet Server worksheet.

1. Start with an existing non-Spreadsheet Server worksheet in Excel. Select the first cell to be populated with aformula (i.e. B4 in the spreadsheet below), then from the SServer menu -or- SS ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears.

2. Select the option Shift Worksheet Data. The Starting Column and Starting Row fields are modified to display thecell previously selected on the worksheet.

3. Enter the appropriate values on the Build a Template panel.

4. Click the Insert icon -or- button. The panel closes and the column and row parameters, and formula are added tothe existing worksheet.

GL Reporting 43


7.2 Formula Assistant

The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet.

Note: Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features and selectedledger. See Formula Assistant for Queries for query related formulas. See JDE Formula Assistant forGXSALES for JDE ledger specific GXSALES formula.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL panel -or- ifFormula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+F -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).


Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual formula parameters. However, if literalvalues are keyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes (").

Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references:On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field.Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up.On the worksheet, select the desired cell.Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field.

Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.


3. Some fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basicprocessing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant -GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information.

Field Description

GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for AccountValues).Note: This section assumes that the parameters will be laid out top downin a single column. Therefore, when entering a cell reference in the firstfield and moving to the next field, the system will populate the other fieldssequentially thru the Period field.




Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats arePER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers may haveother valid formats.

Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e.1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. If selected, the corresponding option and associatedvalue is included in the formula. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Currency,Translated, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), Translated Flag, and Summary Accts


Account Segments: Specify the cells containing the required account segments. This areaassumes that the account segments will be on a row next to each other,so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of thefields (i.e. first account segment cell reference is A13, then clicking thedown arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13,etc.).






GL Reporting 45


4. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXE panel.

Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing forboth account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula.

Field Description

GXE: Fills detail balances into the specified worksheet (see Expand to AccountBalances and Expand to Journals).

Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulasthat will be expanded.

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the finalformatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas.

Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheetto begin inserting the expanded detail.

Headings Specify whether or not to include column headings when expandingdetails. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Autofit Specify whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If notspecified, N (No) is assumed.


Field Description

Clear Sheet Specify whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expandingdetails. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified forthe Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand toJournals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, specify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hocquery is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and DesignerGL ledgers.

Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used forsummarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String= Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balancesat the account level enter '3' (third account segment).

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or fieldname (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDEGXECC formula.

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated atthe selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String =Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third accountsegment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company andgrand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, orDesigner GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number ofsegments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the front ofthe account string. This will need to be taken into consideration whenspecifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals.

Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journalentry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system createsa new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the nextavailable standard Excel table name. The table includes headers andgrand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option isignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level isnot blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

GL Reporting 47


5. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXC panel.

Note: This panel is hidden when ad hoc processing is disabled via a setting in the Configurator.

Field Description

GXC: Used to specify the values for a customized formula. Contact Global forconfiguration of the new formula.

Query Click the down arrow and select the custom ad hoc query to be used forthe customized formula.

Parm 01-10 Specify the appropriate parameters for the customized formula. Fieldvalues will vary based upon the requirements for the customized formula.


6. Fields on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processingis the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXD information.

Field Description

GXD: Displays the description for an account segment or account string.

Parms These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Parms = Segment Num, Value and Ledger.

Account Segments: May or may not be applicable for the GXD formula.

Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information:


BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft



7. The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in theResults Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.

Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet andcloses the panel.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

GL Reporting 49


7.3 GXL Formula for Account Values

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Parameters in the GXL formulawill vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the following asan overview for the GXL formula. Links are available at the bottom to access ledger specific GXL information.

Syntax:=GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Key 1Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type.

Key 2Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type.

Key 3Literals and values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If more than one variable needs to bedefined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 = Translated,Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts.

YearYear identifier.

FormatBasic valid formats are listed below; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats:

PER Activity for a selected period or range of periods

QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number

YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance

LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance

RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified

PeriodCorresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account number. The number of account segments will vary basedupon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list,hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).







7.4 Account Segment Syntax

For parameters that allow a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group) or@ field syntax examples are listed below:

Criteria Type Syntax Results

Single Value 8000 Retrieves value 8000

Mask (wildcard) 85* -or- 85** (see Note) Retrieves values starting with 85

Mask (wildcard) for All Values * Retrieves all values

Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value 8*00 -or- 8_00 Retrieves values 8x00, where x is any character(i.e. 8100, 8200, 8300, ...)

Range 8000.8599 Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599

Blank Values (Infinium and JDEledgers only)

BLANK Retrieves all blank values.

Non Blank Values (Infinium and JDEledgers only)

NOTBLANK Retrieves all non blank values.

Note: JDE ledgers are case sensitive when specifying characters for a segment value.

SAP ledgers must use 85** syntax -- one asterisk (*) for each digit/character being masked.

Value List:A list of values may be entered for an account segment. The list of values may include single values, a range of values,a mask (wildcard) value, segment lists, hierarchy values, @ fields, or an excluded value (indicated by inserting '/' priorto the value). Enclose the value list in square brackets [ ] and use a comma (,) to separate values in the list.


Value List - Single Values [8000,8250,8370] Retrieves values 8000, 8250 and 8370

Value List - Range & Single Value [8000.8599,8750] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, and 8750

Value List - Range & Exclude Value [8000.8599,/8375] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, excluding 8375

Segment Lists and Hierarchy Values:


Segment List ^CASH Retrieves all values in CASH segment list

Hierarchy Value ^̂ 1234 Retrieves all values in group 1234

Note: SAP ledgers use a single caret (^) to identify SAP master data hierarchy sets and a double caret (^^) to identify other SAP set names

(i.e. TCODE GS01 sets). If a master data hierarchy set and segment list are assigned the same name, the calculation uses the

hierarchy set.

@ Fields:The syntax for an @ field is @aaa:bbb (where aaa is the alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator), and bbb isthe field value). The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. An @ fieldmay be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list.


@ Field - Single Value @myfield:2000 Retrieves myfield value 2000

@ Field - using a Value List @myfield:[2000,3000] Retrieves myfield value 2000 and 3000

@ Field - in a Value List [100,@myfield:2000,600] Retrieves value 100 or 600 or myfield value 2000

Note: If necessary, may enter table qualifier (syntax = @table.field:value).

mailto:@table.field:value)

GL Reporting 51


Click the link to go to a related topic: Create/Maintain Segment Lists and Locate Segment.


7.5 List Accounts for a GXL Formula

This feature allows for listing account numbers which will be used in the calculation of a GXL formula.

Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers.

1. Select the desired cell that contains the GXL formula in question, then from the SServer menu select ListAccounts -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts window appears.

2. Review the accounts listed in the grid to ensure the formula is retrieving the appropriate accounts.

3. To modify the list of accounts being displayed on the List Accounts window, alter the value in the Filter field andclick the List Accounts button.

Note: Modifying the filter does not change the account segment values in the spreadsheet cell being referencedby the GXL formula.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

GL Reporting 53


7.6 Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula

The Expand GL Row feature allows the user to expand the balances for GXLs on a single row or for all GXLs on theworksheet into individual account details. This process is similar to the GXE formula, but expands into additional rowson the current worksheet instead of to another designated workbook location. A maximum of 80 columns may beexpanded. The detail rows may expand up or down based upon an option in the user's settings.

Note:For the Expand option to function properly, all parameters must be in a column and at least one account segmentmust be on the row, and a description field should follow the last account segment on the row -or- a blank columnshould exist between the last account segment and the GXL formula. When the original GXL contains an @ field, the expanded rows display the appropriate account segment andassociated @ field value; however, calculated amounts may be overstated and may not foot to the original GXLcalculated amount.

To Expand a Single GL Row: 1. On the desired row to be expanded, select any cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select

Spreadsheet Server>Expand GL Row -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system addsadditional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for the selected GXL(s). The expanded data appearsin blue italics.


To Expand All GL Rows:1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Expand GL Row down arrow and then select

Expand All GL Rows. The system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for all GXLson the worksheet. The expanded data appears in blue italics.

To Collapse GL Rows for a Single Expansion:1. Select any cell within the expanded rows section, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Collapse GL

Row -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system removes the expanded GL rows in theselected section.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions on the Worksheet:1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Collapse GL Row down arrow and then select

Collapse All GL Rows (Worksheet). The system removes all expanded GL rows on the worksheet.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions in the Workbook:1. Select any cell on the worksheet and from the SS ribbon click the Collapse GL Row down arrow and then select

Collapse All GL Rows (Workbook). The system removes all expanded GL rows in the workbook.

GL Reporting 55


7.7 Locate Segment

The Locate Segment function is used to display a list of valid account segment values, @ fields (as defined in theConfigurator), or hierarchy values (a.k.a. parent groups) for each account segment, and to enable the user to insert aselected value to the current active cell in Excel. Both @ fields and ledger specific hierarchy values may be used in aGXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired @ field or hierarchy value. An @ field orhierarchy value may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list.

The syntax for an @ field is @aaa:bbb (where aaa is the alias or field name, and bbb is the field value), or ifnecessary may enter a table qualifier (syntax = @table.field:value). The field value specified may be a singlevalue, mask, range, value list, or segment list.Insert two carets symbols (^̂ ) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula for the system to recognize the hierarchyvalue.

1. Select the cell to contain the segment value, right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Locate Segment. TheLocate A Segment panel appears.

Nav Tip: This step may be replaced by selecting a cell and selecting the menu or ribbon equivalent (see SServerMenu or SS Ribbon).

Note: The first time the Locate Segment function is accessed the system loads and caches VSegments. Amessage and progress bar appear indicating that this process may take a few moments.

2. To toggle between displaying a list of segment values, @ fields, or hierarchy values, select the Value, @ Fields, orHierarchy radio button.

Note:For Data Warehouse and SAP ledgers, the Value and Hierarchy options are not applicable. For Designer GL ledgers, the Hierarchy option is disabled when HSegments are not preloaded.


3. To filter for segment values or hierarchy values for a specific segment, select the desired segment(s) in the IncludeSegments list. The system displays only the segment or hierarchy values for the selected segment(s). Thisfeature does not apply when viewing @ fields.

4. To filter the segment values, @ fields, or hierarchy values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriatecolumn filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character.

5. To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, clickthe column heading a second time.

6. To copy the list of values currently displayed in the list, click the Copy Segment Lists to Clipboard toolbar icon.

7. To insert a value to the current cell process one of the following:For a Value or Hierarchy:

Double click the desired value in the list -or- select the value and click the Insert button. The value is insertedand the panel closes.Select the desired value in the list and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The value is inserted and thepanel remains open.

For an @ Field:Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), double click thedesired alias in the list -or- select the alias and click the Insert button. The alias and assigned value is insertedand the panel closes.Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), select the alias andclick the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel remainsopen.

GL Reporting 57


7.8 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists

7.8.1 Create/Maintain Segment Lists

Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists are used to create a hierarchy of individual segments which can be used in a GXLformula. A segment list may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with thedesired segment list name. A caret symbol ( )̂ must be inserted prior to the segment list name in the formula for thesystem to recognize the segment list. A user's ability to create/maintain segment lists is determined by a parametersetting defined in User settings in the Configurator.

To Create a New Segment List:1. In Excel from the toolbar or ribbon, select Segment Lists (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Segment List

Maintenance panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GLBalances or Query tabs -or- by selecting the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Settings - Generalpanel.

2. To create a new segment list, enter a segment list name (no blank spaces or special characters), description, and

optional user-defined group name, then click the Add List toolbar icon ( ). The segment list is added to theSegment List grid.


3. Use the table to enter data in the Segment List Value section on the Segment List Maintenance panel.

Field Description

And/Or Specify the transition logic between the values or groups, thus indicatingwhether or not the values in the grouping must meet both criteria (AND) oronly meet one criteria (OR) to be included in the segment list. Note: The And/Or selection criteria is ignored for the first list value.

Group Specify an ID number for grouping different lines in the list together. Thevalue defaults to 1.

@ Field Alias If desired, click the down arrow and select the alias, for the @ field asdefined in the Configurator, to be used in the segment list.

Comparison Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the value. Valid values are Between, Equal, Like, Not Between, Not Equal and NotLike. Use Between and Not Between when specifying a range, and Likeand Not Like when using a mask (wildcard). Note: The system modifies the comparison value based upon the criteriaentered in the Value field. Note: May not exclude (i.e. Not Equal) a segment list.

Value Specify the value for the criteria. The value may be a segment value, mask(wildcard), range, existing segment list (nesting), full or partial accountstring, category code, user field value or custom @ field value.Note: For JDE ledgers only, the literals BLANK and NONBLANK are validvalues.

4. Click the Add Value icon ( ). The value criteria is added to the Segment List Value grid.

5. Once the segment list is complete, click X. The panel closes.

To Maintain an Existing Segment List:1. In Excel from the toolbar or ribbon, select Segment Lists (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Segment List

Maintenance panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GLBalances or Query tabs -or- the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Settings - General panel.

2. To sort the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, click on the desired column header. To re-sort indescending order, click the desired column header a second time.

3. To filter the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate columnfilter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character.

4. To modify an existing segment list, select the list and key over the description, group name and/or update thesegment list values as necessary.

5. To move a segment list value up or down in the grid, select the list, then select the value and click the appropriate

Up or Down arrow icon ( or ).

6. To remove a segment list value, select the list, then select the value in the grid and click the Remove Value icon (

).

GL Reporting 59


7. To copy a segment list, select the list and click the Copy List toolbar icon ( ). The Copy Segment List panelappears. Enter the name to be assigned to the new segment list and click OK.

8. To delete a segment list, select the list and click the Remove List toolbar icon ( ).

9. To paste a segment list(s) to the active cell on the spreadsheet, select the desired segment lists(s):

To select a single segment list -- select the list and click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ).To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows, and then

click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ).To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and

select the last list in the range, and then click the Insert List toolbar icon ( ).

Note: If the active cell already contains a value, then the newly selected segment list(s) is added and the values inthe active cell are formatted into a value list. If the active cell contains a mask (i.e. *), then the newlyselected segment list(s) replaces the previous mask.

10. To copy all segment lists (name, description, group name and values) to the clipboard, click the Copy Lists toolbar

icon ( ). The data may then be pasted into Excel, Notepad, Word, etc. for review and/or printing.

11. To lock a segment list, select the list and click the Lock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Locking the segment list allows other users to access the segment listbut prevents changes from being made.

12. To unlock a segment list, select the list and click the Unlock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog boxappears. Enter a valid password and click OK.

Note: In the event the individual required passwords are lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the overridepassword.

13. To unlock all segment lists, click the Unlock All toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter theoverride password and click OK.

14. To purge balances in the cache file for a segment list, select the list and click the Purge List from Cache toolbar

icon ( ). This action may be used when using local cache mode if a segment list is deleted or if list values arealtered.

15. To import segment lists from an ad hoc, Excel spreadsheet or a segment list .mdb file, click the Import Lists

toolbar icon ( ). The Segment List Import panel appears. Select the appropriate source:Ad Hoc -- click the down arrow and select the appropriate ad hoc, and then click Import.Excel -- specify the starting cell and click the down arrow and select the worksheet from which to import, andthen click Import.SegmentList.mdb -- click the ellipse button to browse and select the desired .mdb from which to import, andthen click Import.

Messages appear displaying the segment lists being imported and confirming when the import is complete. ClickClose to close the panel.

Note: When importing from an ad hoc or Excel spreadsheet, follow the supported format guidelines listed at thetop of the Results window.


16. To perform a mass clean up of the segment list .mdb file based upon filter criteria, click the Cleanup Lists

Database toolbar icon ( ). This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information.

17. To display a list of @ fields, click the View @ Field Aliases toolbar icon ( ). A list of @ fields, as defined in theConfigurator, appears.

GL Reporting 61


7.8.2 Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula

A segment list or hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group, set, etc.) may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of theaccount segment values with the desired segment list or hierarchy value name.

Insert a single caret symbol ( )̂ prior to the segment list name in the formula. Note: For Infinium ledgers, the system supports the SSInfinium legacy process of inserting an at symbol (@) prior to a user list segment

list name in the formula; however, a caret symbol may be used instead of an at symbol.

Insert two carets symbols (^̂ ) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula. Note: In the event a hierarchy value and segment list are assigned the same name -AND- a single caret (^) is used, the calculation will

be based upon the hierarchy value instead of the segment list.


Formula Example - Using a Segment List:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";","2003","PER","6","01","*","^MiscExp","*"."*")Retrieves actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for all accounts included in the segment list MiscExp.

Formula Example - Using a Segment List for a User List (Infinium Ledgers Only):Note: A segment list referencing user field values may be used in conjunction with account segment parameters (see

Infinium GXL).=GXL("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*")Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the userfield criteria in the TAX segment list.


7.8.3 SSLDESC Formula

Use the SSLDESC formula to retrieve the description for a segment list.

Syntax:=SSLDESC("Segment List")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within SSLDESC formulas to identify parameters.

Formula Example:=SSLDESC("^MiscExp")Retrieves the segment list description for the MiscExp segment list.

GL Reporting 63


7.8.4 View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel

Spreadsheet Server allows a user to view from a worksheet, the values contained in a specific segment list. The usermay also modify the values "on the fly". Lists can be shared among all Spreadsheet Server users so caution should beexercised when making modifications.

1. Select the desired cell that contains the segment list in question, then from the SServer menu select List Accounts-or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The Segment List Maintenance panel appearsdisplaying the values for the selected segment list (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

2. Segment list values may be added or removed as necessary.

3. In the event values for the segment list were altered, it is suggested to purge the balances in the cache file for the

segment list. To purge balances, Click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ).

4. Once all modifications have been made, click X. The panel closes and returns focus to the spreadsheet.

5. In the event balances were purged in the cache file for the segment list, the GXL formula -or- the local cache willneed to be manually recalculated (see Calculation Options or View/Refresh Local Cache).


7.9 Calculations

7.9.1 Calculation Options

Multiple options are available for retrieving and calculating data within Spreadsheet Server.

1. By default, the calculation function within Excel is set to calculate automatically. Global strongly recommendssetting this value to manual so that all required spreadsheet changes or additions can be completed prior to re-calculating.

Nav Tip:For Excel 2003, this setting is found on the Calculation tab within Excel's Tools>Options menu.

Nav Tip:For Excel 2007 (and above), this setting is found in the Calculation Options section on the Excel'sOptions Formulas panel.

Click the Office button. The Office Menu panel appears.Click the Excel Options button. The Excel Options panel appears.Select Formulas. The Excel Options Formula panel appears.

2. The following options are available for calculating spreadsheets:

F2+Enter Calculates the active cell.

F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks.

Shift+F9 Calculates the active worksheet.

Ctrl+Alt+F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks, regardless of whether they have changedsince the last calculation.

Nav Tip:The majority of these options are also available by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon).

GL Reporting 65


7.9.2 View/Refresh Local Cache

When spreadsheets are calculated, Spreadsheet Server stores the account balances in the either the local or globalcache database (based upon an option in the user's settings). Spreadsheet Server looks first at the cache for accountbalances prior to retrieving the information from the host. As a result, it may be necessary to clear and recalculate thecache file when any of the following occur:

Data has changed on the host system since the prior calculation. A segment list has changed since the prior calculation.The accounts profile has changed since the prior calculation.

To View/Refresh Local Cache:1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select View Cache -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Local

Cache panel appears displaying cached records.

2. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear All button.To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button.To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then clickthe Clear Selected Sheet button.

3. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default Recalculation Option. If necessary, clickthe down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are:

Trigger Excel to automatically recalculate the entire workbook after closing the Local Cache panel.Trigger Excel to automatically recalculate the entire worksheet after closing the Local Cache panel. Do not trigger Excel to recalculate the after closing the Local Cache panel.

4. To automatically trigger the Local Cache refresh, in Excel from the SServer menu select Clear Cache andRecalculate.

Nav Tip:This refresh may also be launched by pressing Shift+Ctrl+R -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.


7.9.3 View/Refresh Global Cache

Two Global Cache cache types are available and require additional component(s) to be installed. Global Cache -- the Global SmartCache component must be installed on a web server or a server running InternetInformation Services (IIS). Global Cache with Redis Technology -- both a Redis database and the Global SmartCache WRT component must beinstalled on a server.

When GXL or GEXQ formulas are submitted to cache for calculation the system returns the value "Pending" ascalculations occur. When items are pending the Cache icon on the ribbon is red, and when all items are completedthe Cache icon is green. Pending items may be automatically refreshed in the workbook based upon an option in theuser's settings.

To View/Refresh Global Cache:1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select View Cache -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Global

Cache panel appears displaying cached records.

2. To view the cache records that are pending, in progress, completed or failed select accordingly: To view completed records in the cache -- click the View Completed button.To view currently caching records -- select the View In-Process button.To view pending cache records -- select the View Pending button.To view failed cache records -- select the View Errors button.

3. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear Cache button.To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button.To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then clickthe Clear Selected Sheet button.

4. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default recalculation option. If necessary, clickthe down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are:

Trigger Excel to recalculate workbook after closing Global Cache.Trigger Excel to recalculate worksheet after closing Global Cache. Do Not Trigger Excel to recalculate after closing Global Cache.

GL Reporting 67


5. To automatically trigger the Global Cache refresh, in Excel from the SServer menu select Recalculate.

Nav Tip:This refresh may also be launched by pressing Shift+Ctrl+R -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features.


7.9.4 Disable/Enable Formula Calculations

Disabling calculations will effectively halt the various Spreadsheet Server formula calculations when Excel calculatesspreadsheets. As a result of disabling calculations, GXD and GEXQ formulas will return <SS Not Connected>values and GXL formulas will return zero values. When disabled, Spreadsheet Server does not communicate to theHost.

Disabling Spreadsheet Server formula calculations can be extremely useful when:Discontinuing calculation of a complex or long-running spreadsheet. Press Shift+Ctrl+Z to quickly disable formulacalculations. A workbook is inadvertently opened whose calculation option is set to automatic. Press Shift+Ctrl+Z to quicklydisable formula calculations. Creating a new worksheet or modifying an existing worksheet by adding columns and/or rows with SpreadsheetServer formulas, and switching a format to/from the range type period. In Excel from the SServer menu, selectDisable Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

To Enable Formula Calculations:1. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS

Ribbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK.

Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 2 is not applicable.






GL Reporting 69


7.10 Drill Down Functionality

7.10.1 General Grid Features

Drill down panels in Spreadsheet Server offer the following features. Some of these basic grid features are alsoavailable in other functions (i.e. List Accounts, Local Cache, Execute Query).

Feature Description

Ad Hoc DrillDown

To drill down from a predefined drill down panel (i.e. Account Balances, Journals, etc.) to dataretrieved by an ad hoc query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select AdHoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used fordrilling down (see Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc).

The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledgerfeature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries existfor the predefined drill down level.

Sub Queries To drill down from one drill down grid to data retrieved by a user-defined query, select thedesired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Sub Queries. Then from the Sub Queriessub-menu, select the query to be used for drilling down.

The Sub Queries option is only available when the user is licensed to the Query or QueryDesigner feature, and sub queries exist for the drill down (see Sub Query Column).

Display SQLStatement

To display the execution time and SQL statement run for the current drill down tab/panel, click

the information button ( ).

Re-sortColumns

To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column indescending order, click the column heading a second time.

AutosizeColumns

To automatically resize column widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the headerand/or data, right click and select Autosize.

Re-size/HideColumns

To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and dragto the desired width.

Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to the desired location.

Copy To copy records to the Windows clipboard, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right clickand select Copy to Clipboard (see Copy/Export Records).

DynamicColumnGroupings

To selectively group records and summarize amount columns by any column, drag the columnheading into the summary section of the panel. To display detail records associated with agrouping, click the '+' next to the desired grouping level. Click the '-' to collapse the expandedview. Multiple levels of summary may be created.


Feature Description

Filter Row To filter data in the grid, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full fieldvalue.

Options Fly OutWindow

Use the Options fly out window to specify exporting options, to create and maintain customgrid layouts, and to control grouping and subtotaling options. The Options fly out window maybe pinned to remain open.

Export:

Select All To select all rows in the grid, select Select All.

Copy/Export To copy or export the drill down/query results data, select the desired rows in the grid, and thenselect the the appropriate copy/export function (see Copy/Export Records).

Grid Layouts: By default the basic grid layout is displayed. Alternate layouts may be created and applied ata later time, or set as the default.

List Box Displays the name of the layout currently being used. Click the down arrow and select thelayout to be applied to the grid.

GL Reporting 71


Feature Description

AutoSize To automatically re-size columns widths in a grid to the maximum length required for theheader and/or data, select AutoSize Column Headers.

Save CurrentLayout

To save the current grid layout, click Save Current Layout. If the layout is new, then specify thename to be assigned to the new layout and click OK.

Save CurrentLayout As

To save the current grid layout as a new layout, select Save Current Layout As. Specify thename to be assigned to the new layout and click OK.

RemoveLayout FromList

To remove a layout, click the down arrow and select the layout to be removed, and then selectRemove Layout From List.

Use Default To apply the default layout to the grid, select Use Default.Note: This feature only applies to the ResultsContainer grid panel.

Set Layout asDefault

To set a default layout to be used for the drill down level and/or query, click the down arrow andselect the desired layout, and then select Set Layout as Default.Note: Currently this feature only applies to Sub Query drill down and ResultsContainergrid panels.

Groups andSubtotals:

To apply subtotals to grouped data, select the check box next to the desired column headerdescription(s). To remove a subtotal, clear the check box for the desired column. Note: Only numerical fields are allowed for subtotaling.

Expand All To expand all grouped data in the grid (thus showing all detail records within all groups), clickthe Expand All button.

Collapse All To collapse all grouped data in the grid (thus showing only group levels), click the Collapse Allbutton.

Sum Footers To display totals for numeric columns at the bottom of the drill down panel, select the SumFooters check box.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, orExecute Query.


7.10.1.1 Copy/Export Records

Spreadsheet Server allows for copying or exporting records from various panels (i.e. drill down, List Accounts, LocalCache, ResultsContainer). Copying and/or exporting options may vary slightly for different functions; however, basicprocessing is the same.

1. From the drill down or List Accounts grid, select the desired record(s):To copy/export a single record -- select the desired record.To copy/export select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows.To copy/export multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key,and select the last record in the range. To copy/export all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options fly out window selectSelect All.

2. Right click and select the appropriate copy/export function -or- on the Options fly out window, select theappropriate copy/export function.

Copy to Clipboard -- places data on Windows clipboard. Copy to Clipboard w/Headings -- places data including headings on Windows clipboard. Copy to Excel (Simple) -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3.Export to CSV, PDF, RTF, or Excel (Full Format) -- brings up Windows Explorer panel.Export to Excel -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3.

3. On the Copy into Excel panel, specify the following processing criteria:Include Headings -- if selected, column headings are included in the copy. Select the appropriate radio button to indicate whether to copy to a worksheet, range or table destination. Whencopying to a worksheet, enter the starting cell in which to place the data and the target worksheet (new orexisting). When copying to a range or table, click the down arrow to select select the desired range or table.

4. Click OK to copy the data onto the worksheet.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, orExecute Query.

GL Reporting 73


7.10.2 Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make upthe value. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balanceaccounts based upon options in the user's settings.

1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The AccountBalances drill down appears showing the balance for each individual account.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting a cell and then selecting the menu, toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

Nav Tip:The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a worksheet by selecting the ribbon equivalent (seeSS Ribbon).


7.10.3 Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make upthe value. Summary drill down functionality allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping orsummarizing the accounts when displaying the account balances which make up the value. The drill down results canappear in a single panel or tabbed panel, exclude zero balance accounts, and display or omit the Summary Drill Downprompt panel based upon options in the user's settings.

1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Summary Drill Down -or-select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Summary Drill Down panel appears listing account segmentsbased upon the GXL formula and defaulting selections based upon the last time the function was used.

Nav Tip:This panel may be by-passed based upon an option setting in the user's setting or by selecting theribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon).

2. On the Summary Drill Down panel, select the account segments to be used for summarizing.

3. Click OK. The Summary Drill Down appears showing the balance for each detail account summarized based uponthe account segments selected on the previous panel (i.e. company, department, account in the example below).

Note: The Journal List for Selected/All Accounts and Ad Hoc Drill Down options are not available from theSummary Drill Down panel.

GL Reporting 75


7.10.4 Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from multiple cells on the same row on a spreadsheet to see what accountbalances make up the values. A maximum of 80 columns may be selected. The drill down results can appear in asingle panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's settings.

1. Select multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas, then right click and select SpreadsheetServer>Drill Down. The Multiple Account Balances drill down appears showing detail account balances for eachcolumn. If only two columns were selected, a variance column will automatically be displayed.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting multiple cells and then selecting the menu, toolbar orribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).



7.10.5 Drill Down to Journals per Account(s)

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down to journals from detail account balances or directly from a GXL formula. Thedrill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings or appear on aworksheet based upon the method used to execute the function.

Note:Drill down to journals displays YTD journals when the specified Format is LTD.This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers.For older versions of Infinium ledgers where the TXPJNO field does not exist, ensure that the exclude option isselected in the Configurator for the Infinium host configuration.

To Drill Down to Journals from Detail Account Balances:1. From the Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s):

To select a single account -- double click the account. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals forthe selected account.To select multiple accounts -- press and hold the Ctrl key as accounts are selected on the grid rows, and thenright click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals forall the selected accounts.To select multiple accounts in a range -- select the first account in the range, press and hold the Shift key andselect the last account in the range, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. TheJournals drill down appears displaying journals for all the selected accounts.To select all accounts in the grid -- right click and select Journal List for All Accounts. The Journals drill downappears displaying journals for all accounts.

From the Multiple Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s):To select a single account/period -- double click the desired account, specify the desired column number andclick OK -or- double click the desired amount. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for theselected account/period.Note: To select multiple accounts, see above for basic processing steps.

GL Reporting 77


2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel.

Warning:Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system.

To Drill Down to Journals from a GXL Formula on a Worksheet:1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS ribbon, click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL

Journals. The system pushes the drill down journal results for all accounts associated with the GXL formula to aworksheet.


7.10.6 Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the journal entry lines which make up the journal (batch). Thedrill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings.

Note: This function only applies to BPCS, Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. For BPCS ledgers, an option in theuser's settings controls a user's authority to this function. For Infinium and JDE ledgers, user settings in theConfigurator control a user's authority to this function.

1. From the Journals drill down, double click the desired journal -or- select the desired journal, right click and selectDisplay All Lines of Selected Journal. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying all the entry lines forthe journal.



GL Reporting 79


7.10.7 Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the detail journal entry lines which make up the journal. Thedrill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings.

Note: This function only applies to BPCS ledgers.

1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Detail Journal Lines. TheJournal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying detail journal entry lines for the journal.




7.10.8 Drill Down to Subsystem Detail

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the subsystem detail which make up the journal. The drilldown results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings.

Note: This function only applies to Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers.

1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Subsystem Detail. The SubSystem Lines drill down appears displaying subsystem details for the journal.

GL Reporting 81


7.10.9 Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from a predefined drill down panel or directly from a GXL formula to an ad hocquery. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon options in the user's settings, orappear on a worksheet based upon the method used to execute the function. The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is onlyavailable when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator securitysetting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level.

Note: When processing an ad hoc query drill down, the list of available ad hoc queries is controlled by the Filter by GLoption on the Settings - Ad Hoc Queries panel (see SS Settings).

To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a Drill Down Panel:1. From the predefined drill down panel, select the desired record(s) in the grid:

To select a single record -- click the record. To select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows.To select multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key andselect the last record in the range.To select all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All.

2. Right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be usedfor drilling down. The system displays the appropriate Ad Hoc Drill Down panel.

To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a GXL Formula on a Worksheet:1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS ribbon, click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL

Journals>Prompt. The Select an Ad Hoc Query panel appears.

2. Select the query to be used for drilling down and click OK. The system pushes the drill down results for allaccounts associated with the GXL formula to a worksheet.


7.11 Miscellaneous Features

7.11.1 List Accounts

Spreadsheet Server enables the user to generate a list of existing accounts. Filtering is available to control whichaccounts are listed.

Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu select List Accounts -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts panel appears.

2. On the List Accounts panel, specify the desired criteria (fields vary based upon selected ledger) and filter for whichaccounts to display, and then click the List Accounts button. The appropriate accounts are displayed on the ListAccounts panel. If the filter is left blank, the system will retrieve all account masters. When using a filter, a validaccount string combination should be used. In addition, the filter can include masks, ranges, and/or segment lists.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts for a GXL Formula, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

GL Reporting 83


7.11.2 Account Security

An Accounts Profile allows an administrator to control the account strings that a particular user may access. AnAccounts Profile may be set up via the Maintain Accounts Profile button (see instructions below) or via theConfigurator. If Override User Account Profile values are assigned to the user in the Configurator, then the MaintainAccounts Profile function is only used to display, not maintain, the Accounts Profile.

Note: This feature is not applicable for Infinium, JDE or Oracle ledgers. Refer to the Oracle Database Security Notessection in the Configurator User Manual for Oracle security processing.


Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selecting thetoolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

2. Select GL Reporting on the navigation pane. The Settings - GL Reporting panel appears.

3. Click the Maintain Accounts Profile button. The Accounts Profile panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting Accounts Profile from the ribbon on the Control Panel -GL Balances tab.

4. Click the Segment Labels down arrow and select the ledger or Designer GL definition for which to display accountsegments.

5. In the Account Mask fields on the Accounts Profile panel, specify the account string to which the user will haveaccess and click the Add button. Single account values, masks, ranges, value lists and segment lists. Whenusing a segment list, the segment list may not include "excluded" values. A maximum of 20 different accountstrings is allowed per profile.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all account masks for the account profile have been added.


7. To remove an account mask from the list, select the value in the list and click the Remove button. To remove allaccount masks from the list, click the Clear All button.

8. To lock the account profile for security purposes (i.e. prevent others from making changes to the account profile),click the Lock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Thispassword is required to change the account profile. It is not mandatory to lock an account profile.

9. To unlock the account profile, click the Unlock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the validpassword and click OK.

Note: In the event the individual password is lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password.

10. When the account profile is complete, click the Close button.

GL Reporting 85


7.11.3 SS Validation

Spreadsheet Server gives the user the ability to create a validation list in a specific cell in Excel. Validation lists aredrop down lists that allow the user to choose from a valid list of options/field values.

1. Select a cell to hold the validation list, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Validation. The DataValidation panel displays. The available types of data on the panel vary based upon the selected ledger.

Nav Tip:This step may be replaced by selecting a cell and selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SSToolbar or SS Ribbon).

2. Select the type of data for which to build a list or enter valid values separated by a comma in the Custom field, andclick OK to push validation to the current cell.

Note: Validation Lists are limited by Excel to 255 characters.

3. On the Excel worksheet when the appropriate cell is selected, a drop down button appears indicating that validvalues exist for the cell. Click on the drop down arrow button to display the Validation List.

4. Click on the desired value. The system returns the selected value to the appropriate cell.

5. To maintain valid values for a cell, select the cell and from the Excel menu, select Data>Validation -orfrom theRibbon select Data>Data Tools>Data Validation. The Data Validation panel appears. Refer to Excel Help foradditional instructions.


7.11.4 Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet

The Generate Account Detail option allows the user to create an audit trail which lists the individual accounts andbalances included in the GXL formulas of the worksheet.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet -or- select the ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon). The Generate Account Detail Options panel appears.

2. On the Generate Account Detail Options panel, specify the following processing criteria:Source Worksheet Input - Column - Identify the column within the worksheet that contains the report linedescription. This description is used as the first column in the extracted audit trail.Source Worksheet Input - Row - Identify the first row containing a GXL formula to be used in generating thedetail. This will set the starting point for the extracted audit trail. Target Options - Indicate whether to copy the selected records to the standard Windows clipboard or topaste data directly to a target worksheet in the spreadsheet. When pasting directly to a worksheet, astarting cell into which to place the data and a target worksheet (new or existing) must be specified.

3. Click OK. An audit trail showing the line description, all included accounts, and their balances will be generated.

GL Reporting 87


7.11.5 Expand Detail Reports (GXE)

The Expand Detail option allows the user to select a single or multiple financial statement lines using GXL formulas andexpand the line(s) into the individual account details, similar to the Generate Account Detail option. This process isprimarily used to launch detailed financial statements into the same template. This option can be used for multipledepartments to ensure consistency for each report. Instead of creating each possible account number as different rowsin the spreadsheet, a single line can be created that contains ranges, segment lists, or wildcards. This line will then beexpanded into the applicable individual accounts and placed into a formatted worksheet via table, range, or row. Themaximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's settings. See Expand to AccountBalances.

Additionally, the Expand Detail option allows the user to create a detail journal voucher listing for a specific summarybalance of accounts using the GXE formula. This process works similarly to the Expand Detail option for accountdetail, but uses additional parameters. See Expand to Journals.

The GXE formula contains a Part 1 and Part 2. Both parts are identical. Optionally use Part 2 to add a second GXEcalculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXEformula.


7.11.5.1 Expand to Account Balances

1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single report line becomes the basis for the expanded report. When the process is executed the single linewill be expanded into individual account lines and placed into the final formatted worksheet (see below).

Note: The maximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's settings.

The example below shows a report based on an account mask.GXL formulas are created in a single line. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cellsB9:B13. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency)are entered in each column heading (B1:C7). The actual GXL formulas are contained in cells B16 and C16.Standard Excel formula is used to calculate the variance in cell D16.Various literals are entered in cells E16:K16. This designation will generate the associated value into thatparticular column. Valid literals are ACCTNUM (account number), ACCTDESC (account description), andACCTSEGnn (where nn equals the account segment number, such as 01, 02, 03, etc).Note: The GXE also supports legacy SSInfinium user field literals (UF01, UF02, UF03 and UF04), in addition to legacy SSJDE

account (i.e. ACCTCO, ACCTBU, ACCTOBJ, etc.) and category code (CATCODE, CATDESC) literals.

2. Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row andparameters for the formula.

Field Description Example

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 18

GL Reporting 89



Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summaryformulas that will be expanded.

GXE Source

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formattedworksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

GXE Target


16

Target Table, Range,or Row

Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the targetworksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail.Note: When using a target range, identify the Excel range as all cellsunder the columns headers. In the example, Range1 is for cells A5thru J5.

Range1

Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

N

Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

N

Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheetbefore expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specifiedfor the Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

N

Journals OnlyColumn

Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank)

Journals Ad HocQuery


Summarize BalanceLevel

If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to beused for summarizing data when expanding account balances.

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias orfield name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode orBUCatCode to control how to group expanded data.

4

Total Journal Level Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank)

Convert Journals toTable


3. After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formulaare inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above).

Formula Example:=GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30)

4. Format the Target Worksheet with headings in rows 1-3, blank rows in rows 4-6, and totals in row 7. Set each totalto a range of rows 4-6 (i.e. =SUM(B4:B6)). When the Expand Detail Reports function is initiated, the total line isshifted down or up, based upon the number of data rows populated each time the expansion is processed.


5. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select GenerateAll Detail Reports (GXE) -or- press Shift+Ctrl+E -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results forall GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

GL Reporting 91


7.11.5.2 Expand to Journals

Note: The GXE expand to journals feature is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single balance becomes the basis for the journal entry detail. When the process is executed the singlecolumn balance will be expanded into detail journal lines and placed into the target worksheet (see below).

The example below shows a GXL formula totaling on an account mask. In the example, the account stringparameters are shown in cells B10:B14. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format,period, translated, currency) are entered in the cells B1:B7. The actual GXL formula is contained in cell B17.

2. Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row andparameters for the formula.


Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 19


Field Description

Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summaryformulas that will be expanded.

GXE Source

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formattedworksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

GXE Target


17

Target Table, Range,or Row

Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the targetworksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail.

1

Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheetbefore expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Journals OnlyColumn

Specify the column containing the GXL balance for which to generatejournal detail.

B

Journals Ad HocQuery

If desired, identify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journaldetail.Note: An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for DataWarehouse and Designer GL ledgers.

Summarize BalanceLevel

For JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or field name(as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. Otherwise field is not applicablewhen using the GXE to expand journal detail.

(leave blank)

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals aregenerated at the selected level and each previous level. Note: This function is not applicable for Data Warehouse or DesignerGL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the numberof segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the frontof the account string. This will need to be taken into considerationwhen specifying the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals.

4

Convert Journals toTable

If desired, click the down arrow and select whether or not to placeexpanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is used,the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet andassigns the next available standard Excel table name. The tableincludes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hocquery is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a rangeor table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) isassumed.

N

GL Reporting 93


3. After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formulaare inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above).

Formula Example:=GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30)

4. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select GenerateAll Detail Reports (GXE) -or- press Shift+Ctrl+E -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results forall GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.


7.11.6 Hide Rows with Zero Balances

The Hide Rows with Zero Balances function will analyze the active workbook or worksheet and perform a row hidefunction for any spreadsheet row that contains GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells. This function isvery effective for standardized reporting templates such as departmental reports. Multiple rows can be created as atemplate but the function can then hide non-used or zero rows.

To Hide Rows with Zero Balances in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Hide Rows with Zero Balances -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon

equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

To Hide Rows with Zero Balances on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS ribbon, click the Hide Rows down arrow and then select Hide Zero Balance Rows

(Worksheet).

To Restore Hidden Rows in the Workbook:1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Restore Hidden Rows -or- select the SS toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see

SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

To Restore Hidden Rows on the Worksheet:1. In Excel from the SS ribbon, click the Restore Rows down arrow and then select Restore Hidden Rows

(Worksheet).

GL Reporting 95


7.11.7 Reset Host Server Connection

Spreadsheet Server allows the user to switch from one host server to another without having to close and restartExcel.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Disable Spreadsheet Server -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent(see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SSRibbon). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK.

Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 3 is not applicable.







7.11.8 SS View Log

During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected,then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.



2. On the General panel, click the View Log button. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, timeand description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of thenumber of entries listed.

Nav Tip:Steps 1 and 2 may be replaced by selecting the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon).

Note: To select a different time format or font size, click the respective drop down arrow in the bottom right handcorner.

3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then eitherclick the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popuppanel:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last record in the range.

GL Reporting 97


4. To email the entire log file to the helpdesk, click the Email Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook®email panel with the log file attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.

Note: When emailing the log via the View Log button from the Settings function, system information isautomatically added to the body of the email.

5. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired message type(s), date/time range, containing text, class and/or method in the Filter section. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. Click the ClearFilter button to reset all filter fields to their default value.

6. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Nextbutton. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find thenext occurrence of the selected value.

7. To clear the log file, click the Clear Log button.

8. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panelappears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in thelist. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button toreturn to the Log Viewer panel.

9. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.


7.11.9 Upgrade Segment List

The Upgrade Segment List function is used to convert pre-V14 Spreadsheet Server segment lists to the revised V14segment list file format. A user's ability to upgrade/maintain segment lists is determined by a parameter settingdefined in User settings in the Configurator.

Note: If the segment list has not been converted to the revised V14 format, then the user may be prompted to convertthe segment list file during the install of V14, when starting Spreadsheet Server, or when accessing the SegmentList function.

To Upgrade the Segment List File:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Upgrade Segment List. The

Upgrade Segment List panel appears.

2. Click OK. The system makes a backup of the segment list file, converts the file and displays message(s)indicating the results.

Note: After the segment list upgrade process is complete, Global recommends reviewing all segment lists via theSegment List function.

GL Reporting 99


7.11.10 Upgrade Workbook

The Upgrade Workbook function is used to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in aworkbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas.

Legacy Formulas Revised Formulas Ledger(s)

GXA, GXAB, GXU, FXA (see note) GXL BPCS, Infinium, JDE, Movex,select Designer GLs

EXQ, EXD, EXI, EXS GEXQ, GEXD, GEXI, GEXS respectively not applicable

Description formulas (i.e. GXD,BUDESC, CODESC)

GXD Infinium, JDE

Report formulas (i.e. GXE, GXECC) GXE Infinium, JDE

GXSALES GXSALES JDE

Note: Legacy JDE FXA formulas convert to JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL formulas.

To Upgrade a Workbook:1. Open the workbook containing the formula(s) to be converted, then from the SServer menu, select Upgrade

Workbook -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The Upgrade Workbook Options panel appears. The available options will vary based upon the selected ledger and the user's licensed features.

2. Select the desired formula(s) to be converted, then click Convert. The system makes a backup of the workbook,converts the formulas accordingly and displays message(s) indicating the results.

Note: After converting legacy JDE FXA formulas assigned to multiple host configurations (i.e. SSFXA1, SSFXA2),manual intervention may be required to modify the Designer GL definition assigned to the GXL formulas.


7.12 Analyst

7.12.1 Analyst Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Analyst ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears.

3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol beingused: Options 1 - iSeries or SQL Server:

Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries or SQL Server sign onPassword - standard iSeries or SQL Server password

Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect:Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the databaseService - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is locatedPort - port numberUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

GL Reporting 101


Option 3 - Oracle Client:Do not select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net ManagerUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

4. Click OK.

Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset HostServer Connection.


7.12.2 Analyst Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Analyst ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Valid values are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, andBUDGETQTY.

Budget Name When Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY, click the down arrowand select the budget name for which to retrieve data.


Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE.


Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

GL Reporting 103


7.12.3 Analyst GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Analyst ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Data Type","Budget Name","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Data TypeIdentifies the data type. Valid types are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY.

Budget NameIdentifies the budget name. This value is required when Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY.

Key 3Currently not used. Enter 0.


FormatFormat options are:

PER Activity for the selected period






Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, GL Account, Department, Product, SalesRep, Region, Customer Type, Budget Account, Employee). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segmentlist, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("ACTUALAMT","*","2004","PER","1","10","1*","*","*","*","*","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2004 with a mask for every GL account beginning with "1".


Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for AccountValues.

GL Reporting 105


7.12.4 Analyst GXD

For an Analyst ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Num","Value")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Segment NumIdentifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

ValueIdentifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("2","1200")Retrieves the description for account segment 2 value 1200.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD("1","10")& "-" &GXD("2","1200")Retrieves the description for company segment 10 and concatenates the description for account segment1200.

Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.


7.13 BPCS

7.13.1 BPCS Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a BPCS ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 thru 5 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries password

4. Click OK.

5. For BPCS 6.02 users only, on the BPCS Chart of Accounts Name panel specify the name of the chart of accountsto be used and click OK.


GL Reporting 107


7.13.2 BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 4.05CD panel, or to access other functions. Alink is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 4.05CD ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balancesand Descriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database

If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloadedlocal PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from thehost General Ledger system.

Operate CompletelyDisconnected from Host

When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PCDatabase and this option are selected, the user works disconnected fromthe host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 4.05CD Library Options:

Budget Library Specify the name of the library containing budget data.

Budget File Name Specify the name of the file containing budget data.

Library for RCOL01 Specify the name of the library containing the RCOL01 file.

BPCS 4.05CD ProcessingOptions:

GXL: Include Opening Balancein YTD Format Calculations

If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculatingthe YTD format.

GXL/Drill Down: IncludeConsolidated Accounts

If selected, the GXL formula and drill downs include consolidated accountsin the account balance.

Drill Down: Allow Journal Lines If selected, drill down to journal lines is allowed. This function is passwordprotected.

List Accounts: ExcludeInactive Accounts

If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts.


Button Function

Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user todownload account balances to a local database in order to optimizecalculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data).

Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

GL Reporting 109


7.13.3 BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.02 panel, or to access other functions. A linkis available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 6.02 ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balances andDescriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database



When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded LocalPC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnectedfrom the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 6.02 Chart of AccountOptions:

Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the BPCS chart of accounts from whichto retrieve data.

Number of Segments inAccount Structure

Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company,Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.


Field Description

Segments 1 - 14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may bechanged if necessary.

Account Segment NumberUsed for GXD Descriptions

Specify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptionsfor GXD formulas and on the Account Balances drill down panel.

BPCS 6.02 ProcessingOptions:



GXE: Display Analysis Data inJournal Results

If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXEformula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based uponthe size of the journal detail file on the host system.



Journal Entry Drill Down: ViewPreference

Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in thejournal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted.

Button Function


Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them basedupon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of availablechart of accounts.


GL Reporting 111


7.13.4 BPCS 6.04+ Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.04+ panel, or to access other functions. A linkis available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 6.04+ ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balancesand Descriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database



When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PCDatabase and this option are selected, the user works disconnected fromthe host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 6.04+ Chart of AccountOptions:

Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the appropriate BPCS chart of accountsfrom which to retrieve data.


Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company,Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.

Segments 1 - 14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. Thesedefault based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed ifnecessary.


Field Description

BPCS 6.04+ ProcessingOptions:



GXE: Display Analysis Data inJournal Results

If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXEformula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based uponthe size of the journal detail file on the host system.




Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in thejournal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted.

Button Function


Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them basedupon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of availablechart of accounts.


GL Reporting 113


7.13.5 BPCS Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a BPCS ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Datagroup (Version 4.05) Specify the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE,BUDGETA, BUDGETB, and CBnn (where nn is the budget number).

Ledger (Version 6+) Specify the CEA ledger.

Book (Version 6+) Specify the CEA book.

Year (Version 6+) Click the down arrow and select the reporting year.

Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, PERJ, QTRJ and YTDJ.




7.13.6 BPCS GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a BPCS ledger.

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXL("Datagroup","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment3")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXL("Ledger","Book","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Datagroup (Version 4.05)Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn(where nn equals the budget number).

Ledger (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA ledger.

Book (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA book.

Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessaryliteral and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by asemi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank,Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on.Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.

Year (Version 6+)Year identifier.




YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel



PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs

QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs

YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

GL Reporting 115



Account Segment 1 - 14Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchyvalue or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values:=GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","000","15130")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using a Mask and a Range:=GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","*","21454.22999")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for all departments for the account range of 21454 thru 22999.



7.13.7 BPCS GXD

For a BPCS ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. For BPCS6.02 ledgers, ledger specific settings in the user's settings determine the account segment used to retrieve the accountdescription.

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXD("Account String")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXD("Account String","Ledger")


Parameters:Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger.


Formula Example - Version 4.05:=GXD("30-000-31112")Retrieves the account description for the account string 30-000-31112.

Formula Example - Version 6+:=GXD("50-000-31112","JRH")Retrieves the account description for the account string 50-000-31112 from the JRH ledger.


GL Reporting 117


7.13.8 BPCS 6+ GSV

For a BPCS Version 6+ ledger only, the GSV formula is used to retrieve a segment description for any segment in theaccount string.

Syntax - Version 6+:=GSV("Segment Value","Segment Name")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GSV formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Segment NameThe segment name represents the exact name of the segment within CEA.

Formula Example:=GSV("540","DEPT")Retrieves the segment description for DEPT 540.


7.13.9 BPCS GXA

The GXA formula is a legacy formula used to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Thefollowing is an overview for the GXA formula for a BPCS ledger.

Note: The GXA formula has been retained for backwards compatibility with prior Spreadsheet Server releases. TheGXL formula has been created to replace the GXA formula (see BPCS GXL). Use the Upgrade Workbookfunction to convert GXA formulas to GXL formulas (see Upgrade Workbook).

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXA("Account String","Datagroup","Format","Period","Key 3")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXA("Account String","Ledger","Book","Year","Format","Period","Key 3")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXA formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Account StringThe account string represents the account segments delimited by a dash. The number of account segments willvary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, orsegment list (see Account Segment Syntax).

Datagroup (Version 4.05)Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn(where nn equals the budget number).


Book (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA book.

Year (Version 6+)Year identifier.







PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs

QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs

YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

GL Reporting 119



Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessaryliteral and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by asemi-colon. Enter leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "STAT" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, SpreadsheetServer uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4")Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Statistics:=GXA("50-*-*","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","STAT")Retrieves the statistics balances from the actual book within the JRH ledger for period 4 for an account mask.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Alternate Library Name:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","BPCS")Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account from the alternate library, BPCS.


Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Budget Manager:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2004" "PER","4","Budget:Fiscal2005:003")Retrieves the budget balance from budget Fiscal2005 revision 003, for period 4 of 2004 for a single account string.

GL Reporting 121


7.13.10 BPCS Load Local Data

For BPCS ledgers, the option exists to download account balance information into a local database, allowing foroptimized calculation speeds.



2. From the navigation pane under Ledger Specifics, select the appropriate BPCS ledger. The selected Settings -Ledger Specifics panel appears.

3. On the Ledger Specifics panel, click the Load Local PC Database button. The Load Local PC Database panelappears.

4. The top portion of the panel identifies the location for the local database. This setting defaults from user settingsbut may be changed by clicking the Browse button and selecting a new location.

5. Select whether or not to include the chart of accounts and/or segment descriptions in the download. In addition,the middle portion of the panel displays the existing data in the database. Click the ledger to be downloaded. Tomake multiple selections, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired ledgers -or- to select all ledgers, clickthe Select All button.

6. Once selection is complete, click the Load BPCS Local Database button. The progress of the download displayson the bottom portion of the panel. To stop the download process, click the Stop Loading button.

7. When the download is complete, click OK.


7.14 Data Warehouse

7.14.1 Data Warehouse Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Data Warehouse ledger.

Note: When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon)


GL Reporting 123


7.14.2 Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Data Warehouse panel, or to access other functions. Alink is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Data Warehouse Options:

Current Profile Click the down arrow and select the Data Warehouse profile to load.

Button Function

Load Data Warehouse Displays the Load Data Warehouse From GL panel. Use this panel toload data into the Data Warehouse profile.



7.14.3 Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Data Warehouse ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section toreview generic processing fields.

Field Description

Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type

Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization




Profile Click the down arrow and select the desired Data Warehouse profile.


GL Reporting 125


7.14.4 Data Warehouse GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Data Warehouse ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Key1","Key2","Year","Format","Period","Profile","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Key 1Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouseprofile. Ex: Balance Type

Key 2Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouseprofile. Ex: Organization









ProfileIdentifies the Data Warehouse profile.

Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. May be a single value, mask, range, value list,segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("Actuals","ABC","2009","PER","1","SS_Sample","ABC","1*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2009 with a mask for every account beginning with "1".

GL Reporting 127


7.14.5 Data Warehouse GXD

For a Data Warehouse ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","AccountSegment 5"...)


Parameters:Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile.

Formula Example:=GXD("ABC","115","00","01")Retrieves the account description for the account string ABC-115-00-01.



7.15 Designer GL

7.15.1 Designer GL Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Designer GL ledger.

Note: When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon)

Note: For most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.


GL Reporting 129


7.15.2 Designer GL Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL panel, or to access other functions. A linkis available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Designer GL Options:

File Name Specify the Designer GL file name.

Connection Name Click the down arrow and select the connection name. Right click andselect Refresh to refresh the data.

Key 1 Caption Specify the caption for key 1.

Key 1 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 1 drop down list.

Key 2 Caption Specify the caption for key 2.

Key 2 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 2 drop down list.

SQL TRIM Supported If selected, the TRIM function used in SQL to remove a specified prefix orsuffix from a string is supported.

Preload HSegments If selected, HSegment values are preloaded into cache when SpreadsheetServer is started. If not selected, the Hierarchy option in the LocateSegment function is disabled, as there are no values to display.

Button Function

Set Default Designer GL Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select/setthe default Designer GL without having to enter a password.

Load Default GL Definition Loads the default Designer GL data on the panel. This function ispassword protected.


Button Function

Browse for GL Definition Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select aDesigner GL. This function is password protected.

Refresh Acct Key Sec Cache Refreshes the account segment security cache to process any changesmade to ad hoc files.

Note: The various Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL - suboptions are used to maintain Designer GLdefinitions. These panels are password protected. Contact Global for more information.


GL Reporting 131


7.15.3 Designer GL Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Designer GL ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Key 1 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 1 = Library

Key 2 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type




Designer GL Defaults the value from Available Designer GL Definitions.

Available Designer GLDefinitions

Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Note: The system does not verify that the value manually keyed is a valid value (i.e. contained in the drop down list).



7.15.4 Designer GL GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Designer GL ledger.

Note: The Designer GL definition for APlus is being used in the examples below.

Syntax:=GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Key 1Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex:APlus - Key 1 - Library

Key 2Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex:APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type

Key 3Identifies the Designer GL Definition.









Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchyvalue or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Note: For ASI Designer GLs ONLY, when the actual account segment value is '*' in the GL database, use '#' in theGXL formula instead of '*' for the account segment value.

Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8050","5010","310.350")Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 for a range of account codes 310 to 350.

GL Reporting 133


Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8*","5010","310")Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 with a mask for every department beginning with "8".



7.16 Infinium

7.16.1 Infinium Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Infinium ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name:

Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the ConfiguratorRetrieve account balances from local database

Option 2 - <Sign-On>:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries passwordRetrieve account balances from local database

4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following:Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database pathWork in Local Mode without a connectionNote: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill

downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, Infinium security is not

utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the

Configurator on their hard drive.

5. Click OK.


GL Reporting 135


7.16.2 Infinium Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. A link is available at the bottom of thetable to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Infinium Segment Options:


Specify the maximum number of account segments to be used forprocessing in Spreadsheet Server.

Account Segments Specify the name for each account segment.

User Fields Specify the name for each user field.

Infinium Processing Options:





7.16.3 Infinium Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Infinium ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are M(Monetary), S (Statistical), D (Debit Balances), C (Credit Balances), 1(Numeric User Field 1) and 2 (Numeric User Field 2). Note: Currency must be blank when balance type is S.

Budget/Actuals Specify whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values areACTUALS or the name of the budget.




Currency Specify a valid currency code, or leave blank when retrieving statisticalbalances.

Database Library If applicable, specify the database library from which to retrieve the data. The library entered here overrides the default library in the Configurator orthe library specified during the sign on process.

GL Reporting 137


Field Description

Append If selected, adds an AND/OR user list comparison to the account stringcriteria.

And/Or When Append is selected, specify the appropriate user list criteriaoperand. Valid values are AND (account must meet both the accountstring and user list criteria) and OR (account must meet either the accountstring or user list criteria).

User List When Append is selected, specify the user list to be used by the formula.Note: The user list must be established in the segment list file (seeCreate/Maintain Segment Lists). The syntax used for entering the user listis @nnnn (where nnnn is the user list name).

User Fields Click the down arrow and select whether to toggle the account segmentsto user fields. Valid values are NA (use account segments), Y (use userfields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed.



7.16.4 Infinium GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Infinium ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget/Actuals","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeBalance types are:

M Monetary balances

S Statistical balances (currency code must be blank)

D Debit balances

C Credit balances

1 Numeric User Field 1

2 Numeric User Field 2

Budget/ActualsIdentifies whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the budget name.

Key 3Optionally identifies currency, alternate database library, append user list (AND or OR), use user fields instead ofaccount segments, and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Must be blank whenretrieving statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library which overrides the default library inthe Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process.Enter the literal "ANDUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet both the accountstring and user list criteria.Enter the literal "ORUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet either the accountstring or user list criteria.Enter the literal "INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=X" where X is NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (useaccount segments). If not specified, NA is assumed.Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXXis the budget revision.


GL Reporting 139









Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Segment 2 - 9). The number of accountsegments are based upon the number of segments specified on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. May be a single value, BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Single Values:=GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=","2001","PER","1","001","000","1070","001")Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for account string 001-000-1070-001.


Formula Example - Using User Fields:=GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=";"INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=Y","2001","PER","1","001","BEN","4000","DIST","PROD")Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for company 001 using user fields 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria.

Formula Example - Using a User List:=GXL("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*")Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the userfield criteria in the TAX segment list.


GL Reporting 141


7.16.5 Infinium GXD

For an Infinium ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. In theevent multiple accounts are referenced in a single GXD formula, then the system returns the description for the firstaccount string found, and adds a warning message to the log indicating that the GXD results returned more than onerecord.

Syntax:=GXD("Library","Account String")


Parameters:LibraryIdentifies the alternate library from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional. If left blank, the system uses the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process.

Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments are based upon the number of segments specified on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infiniumpanel.

Formula Examples:=GXD(,"001","310","6000","005")Retrieves the account description for the account string 001-310-6000-005.



7.17 Jack Henry

7.17.1 JH Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Jack Henry ledger.When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries password

4. Click OK.


GL Reporting 143


7.17.2 JH Ledger Specifics

Jack Henry Silverlake

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry Silverlake panel. A link is available at thebottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Jack Henry SilverlakeOptions:

Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger.

Use Alternate Open BalanceCalculation (CMEB1 - CMTD1)

If selected, an alternate opening balance calculation is performed resolvinga Retained Earnings/Consolidation issue in BEGCYR fields.

Jack Henry 20/20

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry 20/20 panel. A link is available at thebottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Jack Henry 20/20 Options:

Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger.



7.17.3 JH Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Jack Henry ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE,CURBAL, YESBAL, BUDGETA and BUDGETB.CIF 20/20 valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE, CBAL,YESBAL, BUDGETA, and BUDGETB.

Time Span Click the down arrow and select the time span for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are CURRENT, PRIOR1, PRIOR2 and FUTURE.CIF 20/20 valid values are CURRENT and PRIOR1.

Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. This field is forinformational purposes only.



Level Click the down arrow and select the account posting level. Zero indicatesdetail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includesall account levels.


GL Reporting 145


7.17.4 JH GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Jack Henry ledger.

Syntax - Silverlake:=GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5")

Syntax - CIF 20/20:=GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2")


Parameters:Data TypeIdentifies the type of data to retrieve. Valid data types are:

Data Type Description Silverlake CIF 20/20

ACTUAL Actual period to date data * *

AGGREGATE Sum of daily balances * *

AVERAGE Aggregate total divided by number of days *

CURBAL Current daily balance *

CBAL Current daily balance *

YESBAL Yesterday balance * *

BUDGETA Budget balances * *

BUDGETB Budget balances * *

Time SpanIdentifies the time span for data to retrieve. Valid time spans are:

Time Span Description Silverlake CIF 20/20

CURRENT Current Year * *

PRIOR1 Prior Year * *

PRIOR2 2 Years Prior *

FUTURE Future Year *

Key 3Identifies the level and the optional alternate library to be used. Enter the necessary literal and a value as definedbelow. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "LEVEL=X" where X is the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1 - 8indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library.

YearYear identifier. For information purposes only (not used in the actual calculation). May enter 0.









Account Segment 1 - 5Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger (i.e. Silverlake = Bank, Branch, Account, Cost Center, Product Code;CIF 20/20 = Branch, Account). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Silverlake - Using Single Values:=GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","1","2102100","0","0")Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string.

Formula Example - CIF 20/20 - Using Single Values:=GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","11200")Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string.


GL Reporting 147


7.17.5 JH GXD

For a Jack Henry ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account String")


Parameters:Account StringIdentifies the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Silverlake:=GXD("1-1-2102100-0-0")Retrieves the account description for the account string 1-1-2102100-0-0 (BANK-BRANCH-ACCOUNT-COSTCENTER-PRODUCT CODE).

Formula Example - CIF 20/20:=GXD("1-11200")Retrieves the account description for the account string 1-11200 (BRANCH-ACCOUNT).



7.18 JD Edwards

7.18.1 JDE Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a JD Edwards (JDE) ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon). The JD Edwards Login dialog box appears.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name:

User ID - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the ConfiguratorRetrieve account balances from local database

Option 2 - <Sign-On>:User ID - standard database sign onPassword - standard database passwordRetrieve account balances from local database

4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following:Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database pathWork in Local Mode without a connectionNote: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill

downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs for company and business unit, and list accounts will not be functional. In

addition, JDE security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user,

thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive.

5. Click OK.


GL Reporting 149


7.18.2 JDE Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - JD Edwards panel. A link is available at the bottom ofthe table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

JD Edwards ProcessingOptions:

Number of Decimal Positionsfor Amounts

Specify the number of positions to move the decimal when displayingdollar amounts. Ex: JDE stores the amount as a whole number (i.e.262350), thus when a '2' is entered for this option, Spreadsheet Serverwould display the amount as 2623.50.

Alternate Language Code Specify the alternative language from the F0901D file to be used fordisplaying account descriptions. Leave the field blank to retrieve accountdescriptions from the F0901 file.

Limit Segment Lookup Resultsto nnnn Records

If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment valuelookup (i.e. Locate Segment panel, or when click the ellipse button for anaccount segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) islimited by the number of records specified.

Journal Drill Down: Do NotInclude MA Code and MA TypeFields

If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expandedreports exclude MA Code and MA Type fields as data output.

Journal Drill Down: Do NotInclude GLAID Field (OutsiderLease)

If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expandedreports exclude the GLALID (Outsider Lease/Well ID) field as data output.


Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display onthe journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted.

Default Configuration Click the down arrow and select the configuration to be defaulted on the Build a Template and the Control Panel panels.


Field Description

JD Edwards Batch Types:

Accounts Payable / AccountsReceivable / Inventory

Specify the single character batch type codes used for the applicablesubsystems. Choices should be separated by a comma.


GL Reporting 151


7.18.3 JDE Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized.Note: In Demo Mode the value is hard coded to GXL Demo.

Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the ledger type code containing thebalances.


Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR,BLTDREQ.


Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currencyassigned in the user settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.

Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of periodbalances.



7.18.4 JDE Formula Assistant for GXL

As fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Formula Assistant section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Configuration Specify the host configuration to be used.

Ledger Type Specify the ledger type code containing the balances.


Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER,QTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ.

Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e.1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currencyassigned in the user settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.

BU Status Code If selected, the business unit status code is included as part of the formulacriteria. Note: When the Budget Manager option is selected, the BU Status Codeoption may not be selected.

GL Reporting 153


Field Description

Blank / Not Blank / Value When BU Status Code is selected, specify whether to compare thebusiness unit status code to blank, not blank or a value. Specific validvalues are K, N, and P (or the cell reference containing the value). Note: When a specific value is entered, double quotes are not requiredaround the value.

Budget Manager If selected, the formula retrieves budget amounts which have been loadedinto Spreadsheet Server from Global's Budget Manager.Note: When the BU Status Code option is selected, the Budget Manageroption may not be selected.

Budget Name / Budget Version When Budget Manager is selected, specify the budget name and budgetversion number (or the cell reference containing the values) from which toretrieve budget data.

Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of periodbalances.


Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant.


7.18.5 JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES

Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXSALES panel.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized.

Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be totaled.

Total Type Click the down arrow and select the type of total to be calculated. Validtypes are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary.

Criteria 01 - 07 Click the down arrow and select the field(s) to be used as filtering criteriafor the formula.

Value Cell Specify the cell location containing the selection value for thecorresponding criteria field.

Retrieve Data from Sales HistoryFile (F42119)

If selected, the formula retrieves data from the Sales History file (F42119). Otherwise, data is retrieved from the Sales Order Detail file (F4211).

Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant or JDE GXSALES.

GL Reporting 155


7.18.6 JDE GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a JDE ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Configuration","Ledger Type","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5","Account Segment 6")


Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve account balances. May specify either the full configurationname or just the number.

Ledger TypeIdentifies the ledger type code containing the account balances. May be a single value, mask or value list (noexcludes allowed); however, a mask or value list is not supported when processing in local mode.

Key 3Identifies currency and balance type, and optionally identifies the business unit status and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined,separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. If not specified, the systemuses the base currency from the user's settings. Enter '*' to retrieve all currencies. Note: In JDE currency amounts are stored in one of two fields, GBCRCX or GBCRCD. If the formula is not returning values, insert an

X before the currency.

Ex: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=XUSD";"WEEKLY=FALSE","2012","PER","1","00001","1","1110","FIB")

Enter the literal "WEEKLY=NNNN" where NNNN is either TRUE or FALSE. Enter the literal "BUSTATUS=NNNN" where NNNN is either BLANK, NOTBLANK, K, N or P.Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXXis the budget revision.








BLTD Activity for period 1 thru the designated period number including the original budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)

BLTDAPR Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the approved budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)

BLTDREQ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the requested budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)



Ledger Type Format Period(s) Results

Actual PER 0 Retrieves balance forward amount

Budget ANY 55 Retrieves beginning original budget amount

Budget ANY 56 Retrieves beginning approved budget amount

Budget ANY 57 Retrieves beginning requested budget amount

Actual orBudget

PER, QTR or RANGE X.X Pulls activity for a range of periods where X.Xrepresents the beginning and ending range of periodnumbers

Account Segment 1 - 6Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Business Unit, Object, Subsidiary,Subledger Type, Subledger). The company, business unit and object are required elements. May be a single value,BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see AccountSegment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Single Values:=GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=***";"WEEKLY=FALSE","1998","PER","6","00001","1","1110","FIB","*","*")Retrieves the activity for period 9 of 1998 using ledger type AA for account string 00001-1-1110-FIB for all subledgers.


GL Reporting 157


7.18.7 JDE GXD

For a JDE ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account string, or company or businessunit segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Configuration","Value","Description Type")


Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configurationname or just the number.

ValueIf description type is Account String (AC), identifies the account string. If description type is Company (CO), identifies the company. If description type is Business Unit (BU), identifies the business unit.

Description TypeIdentifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account String (AC), Company (CO),and Business Unit (BU).

Formula Example - Retrieve an Account String Description:=GXD("1","00001-1-1110-FIB","AC")Retrieves the account description for the account string 00001-1-1110-FIB.


Formula Example - Retrieve a Company Description:=GXD("1","00001","CO")Retrieves the description for company 00001.

Formula Example - Retrieve a Business Unit Description:=GXD("1","1","BU")Retrieves the description for business unit 1.


GL Reporting 159


7.18.8 JDE GXSALES

Use the GXSALES formula to retrieve sales totals based upon sales criteria. Sales data may be retrieved from eitherthe Sales Order Detail file (F4211) or the Sales Order History file (F42119).

Syntax:=GXSALES("Configuration","Total Field","Total Type","Retrieve Data from Sales History File","Criteria01","Criteria 02","Criteria 03","Criteria 04","Criteria 05","Criteria 06","Criteria 07")

Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve sales totals. May specify either the full configuration nameor just the number.

Total FieldIdentifies the related sales field to be totaled. Total field options are:

Description Table.Field

Extended Cost F4211.SDECST

Extended Price F4211.SDAEXP

Gross Weight F4211.SDGRWT

Open Amount F4211.SDAOPN

Qty Backordered F4211.SDSOBK

Qty Canceled F4211.SDSOCN

Qty Committed F4211.SDSONE

Qty Open F4211.SDUOPN

Qty Ordered F4211.SDUORG

Qty Shipped F4211.SDSOQS

Qty Shipped To-Date F4211.SDQTYT

Trade Discount F4211.SDTRDC

Total TypeIdentifies the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary.

Criteria / ValueIdentifies up to 7 criteria parameters and the associated value to be used for selecting data. The list of availableselection criteria fields is maintained in the Configurator by the administrator.

Retrieve Data from Sales History FileIdentifies to retrieve data from the sales history file (F42119) instead of the sales order detail file (F4211).

Formula Example - GXSALES Extended Price - Average Sales:=GXSALES(1, "F4211.SDAEXP","AVG","SALES;HISTORY=YES","F4211.SDTRDJ|D","6/01/1998.6/30/1998","F4211.SDMCU|B12","30","F4211.SDDCTO|A02","SO")Retrieves the average sales totals from sales history file F42119 for order date range 6/1/1998 to 6/30/1998.


Click the link to go to a related topic: JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES.

GL Reporting 161


7.18.9 JDE GXSALES Drill Down

Once GXSALES formulas are constructed, drill down capability to the sales detail related to the amount, quantity orweight exists. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon an option inthe user's settings. Additionally, GXSALES criteria in the Configurator determines whether or not a field appears in theSales Detail drill down grid.

1. Select a cell containing a GXSALES formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. TheSales Detail drill down appears showing the associated sales detail from the F4211, F4101 and F0101 files.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting a cell and then selecting the menu, toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).



7.18.10 JDE Fixed Asset Balances

Global delivers Designer GL definitions, JDE_iSeries_FXA, JDE_Oracle_FXA and JDE_SQL_FXA, for retrieving JDEfixed asset account balances from the F1202 file. In addition, associated ad hoc queries are delivered for drilling downfrom JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL account balances to asset details.

Below is a high level summary of the steps required for setting up and using a JDE_FXA Designer GL.

To Setup and Process a JDE_FXA Designer GL:1. Application Configurator>Application Settings>JD Edwards -- ensure the appropriate JDE host connection(s) is

created. Contact your administrator for more information.

Note: JDE host connection(s) created function for both the standard JDE ledger and JDE_FXA Designer GL.

2. Settings>General -- verify the General Ledger Type = JD Edwards.

3. Settings>File Locations -- verify the Ad Hoc Queries and Designer GL Definition file locations.

4. Settings>Ledger Specific>Designer GL -- ensure the proper host connection is assigned to the JDE_FXA DesignerGL definition being used, and set the appropriate default Designer GL definition.

5. On the Control Panel or Build a Template panels, criteria defaults to JDE parameters; however, to process for theJDE_FXA Designer GL, select the appropriate Designer GL definition and criteria on the panel will changeaccordingly. Continue processing as normal.

GL Reporting 163


7.18.11 JDE FASTR Report Conversion

For JDE World customers only (iSeries), Spreadsheet Server offers a utility to convert FASTR report definitions intoExcel workbook formats. Using the template provided, users can select the FASTR program number and revision viathe Get Report lookup feature and convert the report to Excel format.

1. From Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\Users\Public\Public Documents\Global SoftwareInc\Spreadsheet Server\Components. Open the Excel spreadsheet named JDE Fastr Template and enable themacros. The spreadsheet loads and a new menu called FASTR is added to Excel.

2. In Excel from the FASTR menu, select Get Reports. The Host Signon for Reports dialog box appears.

3. On the Signon dialog box identify the host name, user ID and password, and click Sign On. The FASTR Reportspanel appears.

4. On the FASTR Reports panel, specify the name of the library containing the FASTR reports and click ShowReports. A list of reports appears.


5. Double click on the desired report (Program ID and Version ID) to be converted. The conversion process createsan Excel workbook using the Program ID and Version ID as the name and stores it in the location identified at thebottom of the FASTR Reports panel.

GL Reporting 165


7.19 Lawson

7.19.1 Lawson Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Lawson ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Direct Connect:

Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:




4. Click OK.



7.19.2 Lawson Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Lawson ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual Dollars), B (Budget Dollars), AU (Actual Units), and BU (BudgetUnits).

Budget # When Balance Type is B or BU, specify the budget number.





GL Reporting 167


7.19.3 Lawson GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Lawson ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget #","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5")


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), AU (Actual Units), B (Budget), or BU (Budget Units).

Budget #Identifies the budget number. This value is required if Balance Type is either B or BU.

Key 3Not used currently. Enter 0.









Account Segment 1 - 5Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Account Unit, Account, Sub-Account,Chart of Accounts). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","6044*","3*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 6044 and all accountsstarting with 3.


Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","5500*","30100.32999","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 5500 and all accountsin the range of 30100 thru 32999.


GL Reporting 169


7.19.4 Lawson GXD

For a Lawson ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account","Sub Account","Chart Name")


Parameters:AccountIdentifies the account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Sub AccountIdentifies the sub account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Chart NameIdentifies the name of the chart of accounts from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if the specifiedaccount string only exists in one chart of accounts.

Formula Example:=GXD("40100","0","DCHHEALTHSYS")Retrieves the segment description for account 40100 and sub-account 0.



7.20 Movex

7.20.1 Movex Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Movex ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries or SQL Server sign onPassword - standard iSeries or SQL Server password

4. Click OK.


GL Reporting 171


7.20.2 Movex Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Movex panel. A link is available at the bottom of thetable to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Movex Options:

Chart of Accounts by Division If selected, accounts in Movex are division specific. Otherwise, accountsin Movex are not division specific.

Use RVFRFN for Budget Data(Older Movex Versions)

If selected, budget names/data are retrieved from RVFRFN.

Drill Down: By Balance Key If selected, drill downs use the balance key specified on the GXL formula. Otherwise, drill downs use a balance key of 8.

Drill Down: Include ThirdCurrency Amount

If selected, drill downs include the third currency amount.

Period Type for RetrievingBegin/End Dates

Specify the period type to be used for retrieving beginning and endingdates for the company/division. Period types are defined in the CSYPERtable in the Movex database.

Dimension Number Used forAccount Descriptions

Specify the dimension number to be used for retrieving the accountdescription when processing a GXD formula.

Journal Entry Drill Down: MaxDimensions

Specify the maximum number of dimensions to be used when drilling downto journal entry detail. Valid values are 0 - 7.



7.20.3 Movex Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Movex ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Budget Number If applicable, specify the budget number from which to retrieve data. Leaveblank to retrieve actual data.

Budget Revision If applicable, specify the budget revision from which to retrieve data. Entryis required if a budget number is specified.




Balance Key Click the down arrow and select the balance key to be used to retrievedata.

Stat Enter a Y to return statistic values; otherwise enter an N.

Exchange Rate If applicable, click the down arrow and select the exchange rate to bemultiplied by the balances to calculate the reporting amounts.


GL Reporting 173


7.20.4 Movex GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Movex ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Budget Number","Budget Revision","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Budget NumberIdentifies the budget number. If left blank, actual data is retrieved.

Budget RevisionIdentifies the budget revision. A budget revision is required if a budget number is specified.

Key 3Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library, balance key, Budget Manager name/revision and/orexchange rate. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to bedefined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library.Enter the literal "BALANCE KEY=XX" where XX is the balance key.Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.Enter the literal "EXCHRATE=NNNN" where NNNN is the exchange rate.









Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Division, Dimension 1 - 7). May be asingle value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","51*","*","*","*")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts starting with 51 using balance key 8.


Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5100.5500")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts 5100 thru 5500 using balance key 8.

Formula Example - Retrieving Budget Data:=GXL("1","1","BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5710","*","*","*")Retrieves the budget balance for period 4 of 2004 for an account mask using balance key 8, for Budget Number 1and Budget Revision 1.


GL Reporting 175


7.20.5 Movex GXD

For a Movex ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Company","Division","Dimension Number","Dimension Value")


Parameters:CompanyIdentifies the company.

DivisionIdentifies the division.

Dimension NumberIdentifies the dimension number associated with the dimension value.

Dimension ValueIdentifies the dimension value for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example:=GXD("210","AAA","1","5710")Retrieves the account description for company 210, division AAA and dimension 1 value of 5710.



7.21 Oracle

7.21.1 Oracle Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Oracle ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 thru 6 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SSRibbon). The Login dialog box appears.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect:

Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Host - host or IP Address that hosts the databaseService - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is locatedPort - port numberUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

GL Reporting 177




4. Click Login. The Oracle Default Responsibility panel appears, displaying the Responsibility previously selected.

5. Click on the drop down arrow to select a different Responsibility.

6. Click Continue.



7.21.2 Oracle Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel, or to access other functions. A link isavailable at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Oracle Options:

Select Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) to be used(i.e. number of segments, segment labels, etc.). This value is set when anOracle Default Responsibility is selected during sign on -or- when thedefault in Excel on the SServer toolbar is changed. Right click and selectRefresh to refresh the data.

Number of Segments Specify the number of segments which make up the account. This valueis automatically filled by the Select Ledger selection.

Segment Number Used forDescriptions

Displays for the currently selected ledger the segment number to be usedfor retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and whenprocessing GXE formulas. Use the Set Segment Number for All Ledgersbutton to change the value for all ledgers -or- use the Segment Mappingbutton to change the value for a single ledger.

Language Specify the language to be used for account descriptions.

Balance SQL Statement Hintby Balance Type

Click the down arrow and select the balance type (i.e. A (Actual), B(Budget), E (Encumbrance) or P (Project)) and then in the adjacent fieldspecify the user-defined index to be used with the associated balance typewhen processing Spreadsheet Server calculations.

Use Summary Accounts If selected, summary accounts are included with non-summary accountsin the GXL formula calculation. Otherwise only non-summary accounts areused. This option only applies if the GXL Summary Accounts parameter isnot specified or equals NA.

Segments Displays the segment names for the ledger specified above.

GL Reporting 179


Button Function

Segment Mapping Displays the Segment Mapping panel, allowing the user for each ledger toassign the segment number to be used for descriptions and to re-orderaccount segments to match the order defined in the Oracle application(see Segment Mapping).

Set Segment Number for AllLedgers

Displays the Oracle Segment Number Used For Descriptions panel,allowing the user to assign the same segment number to be used fordescriptions to all ledgers. This function is password protected.

Add Sample Hint Inserts a sample index in the Balance SQL Statement Hint field.

View Segment Security Displays any account restrictions based on the current sign-on ID andresponsibility.



7.21.3 Oracle Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Oracle ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Note: When Balance Type = P, then Format should = PER. Balancesretrieved are 'to-date' (i.e. running totals). In addition, drill down is onlyavailable to account balances, not to journals.

Budget/En Type When Balance Type is B or E, click the down arrow and select the budgetor encumbrance name.




Translated Click the down arrow and select whether to display entered or translatedcurrency balances. Valid values are E (Entered), T (Translated), and M(Multiple Reporting Currencies).Note: E must be used if the selected currency is the database'sfunctionality currency or STAT. Note: Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has beenprocessed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period.

GL Reporting 181


Field Description

Currency Specify a valid currency code.

Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) for whichto retrieve data.

Summary Accts Click the down arrow and select which account types to use. Valid valuesare NA (use Summary Accounts option from Settings-Ledger Specifics todetermine whether to include Summary Accounts with Non-SummaryAccounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only Non-Summary Accounts).

FSG Report If desired, select the check box and then use the drop down box to selecta FSG Report for which to create a Spreadsheet Server report. When thisoption is selected various fields on the panel will be disabled.

Convert Missing Values toParent Hierarchies

When FSG Templates is selected, this option becomes enabled. Ifselected, missing single segment values are converted to parenthierarchies when the Spreadsheet Server report is created.



7.21.4 Oracle GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Oracle ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget/EnType","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project).

Budget/En TypeIdentifies the budget or encumbrance name. This value is required if Balance Type is either E or B.

Key 3 Optionally identifies translation type, currency, ledger, account type, and translated flag criteria. Enter thenecessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate thevariables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "TRANSLATED=X" where X is the translation type. Valid types are E (Entered in the selectedcurrency), T (Translated to the selected currency), and M (Multiple reporting currencies). E must be used ifthe selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Prior to selecting T, ensure that thecurrency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period.Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Enter the literal "BOOK=XXX" where XXX is the name of the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) to be used. If not specified,the system uses the ledger identified on the SS toolbar. Enter the literal "SUMMARY=XX" where XX indicates which account types to use. Valid values are NA (useSummary Accounts option from Settings-Ledger Specifics to determine whether or not to include SummaryAccounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only Non-SummaryAccounts). If not specified, NA is assumed.Enter the literal "TRANSLATEDFLAG=X" where X is the name of the translated flag to be used. Enter * to retrieveall records regardless of their assigned translated flag.









GL Reporting 183



Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS(USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for an account mask using Vision Operations (USA) set of books.

Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS(USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110.1999","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for accounts 1110 thru 1999 using Vision Operations (USA) set of books.



7.21.5 Oracle GXD

For an Oracle ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Num","Value","Ledger")


Parameters:Segment NumIdentifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

ValueIdentifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description.

LedgerIdentifies the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if only one ledger isreferenced in the workbook.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("3","1110","Vision Operations (USA)")Retrieves the description for segment 3 value 1110 from the Vision Operations (USA) set of books.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD(("1","01")& "-" &GXD("3","1640")Retrieves the description for segment 1 value 01 and concatenates the description for segment 3 value 1640.


GL Reporting 185


7.21.6 Segment Mapping

Account segments may be re-ordered in the Oracle application. Use the following to re-order account segments in theSpreadsheet Server application to match the order defined in the Oracle application. In addition, use the SegmentMapping function to assign individually for each ledger (a.k.a. set of books) the segment number to be used forretrieving descriptions.

Note: If segments are remapped, then standard delivered segment ad hoc queries will need to be modified. ContactGlobal for assistance.


Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel -or- by selectingthe toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).

2. On the Settings panel, select the Ledger Specifics tab. The Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel appears.

3. On the Oracle panel, click the Segment Mapping button. The Segment Mapping panel appears.

4. On the Segment Mapping panel, use the appropriate drop down boxes to specify the following data:Ledger - Identify the ledger for which to assign the segment number for descriptions or to map/re-order accountsegments in Spreadsheet Server. The system will modify the available account segments based upon theselected ledger. Segment Number Used for Descriptions (SEGMENT X) - Identify the segment number to be used for retrievingaccount descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Account Segments - Identify the proper segment number for each account segment.

5. Click the Save button to write the changes.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, until changes have been made for each ledger.

7. To exit the panel, click the Close button.


7.22 PeopleSoft

7.22.1 PSoft Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a PeopleSoft ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol beingused: Option 1 - SQL Server or DSN:

Host Name or IP Address - system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataDSN Name - name of the DSN connectionUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect:Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:


GL Reporting 187




4. Click OK.



7.22.2 PSoft Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - PeopleSoft panel. A link is available at the bottom ofthe table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

PeopleSoft Options:

Set ID Specify the PeopleSoft set ID.

Drill Down: Apply EffectiveDate Criteria

If selected, drill downs include the effective date as part of the searchcriteria.

Multi-Column Drill Down:Ignore Ledger

If selected, multi-column drill downs ignore the ledger account segmentparameter.

Available Business Units forUser

Displays the business units available for the current user.


GL Reporting 189


7.22.3 PSoft Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a PeopleSoft ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual), B (Budget), and E (Encumbrance).

Business Unit Specify the reporting business unit.




Currency Specify the reporting currency code.



7.22.4 PSoft GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a PeopleSoff ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Business Unit","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget, and E (Encumbrance).

Business UnitIdentifies the business unit.

Key 3Optionally identifies currency. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. Enter 0 or leave blank if notused.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used.








OBAL or OPE Opening balance (i.e. period 0). Note: Any period value entered is ignored.

CBAL or CLO Year to date activity including closing balances and/or adjusting entries (i.e. period 0 - 54). Note: Any period value entered is ignored.

BP Budget amount for the selected period


Account Segment 1 - 10Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Ledger, Fund Code, Department, Class Field,Program Code, Chart Field 1, Account, Project, Affiliate, Statistics Code). May be a single value, mask, range, valuelist, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

GL Reporting 191


Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","20000","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, department 21400 and allaccounts starting with 4.

Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","21000.21999","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, departments in the range of21000 thru 21999, and account 400000.



7.22.5 PSoft GXD

For a PeopleSoft ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Value")


Parameters:Segment ValueIdentifies the segment value for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("402000")Retrieves the description for account segment 402000.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD("402000")& "-" &GXD("3000")Retrieves the description for account segment 402000 and concatenates the description for project segment3000.


GL Reporting 193


7.23 SAP

7.23.1 SAP Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a SAP ledger. When user settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. The dialog boxes used to sign onto Spreadsheet Server are determined by the Use SAP Login Dialog option in theuser settings and the connection type assigned to the host configuration in the Configurator .

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SServer Disabled menu, select Start Spreadsheet Server -or- select the SS ribbon equivalent(see SS Ribbon). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box -or- the SAP Logon dialog box appears.

3. On the Sign On or Logon dialog box specify the following information:Option 1 - Using Legacy SAP GUI connection type:

From the list of SAP systems in your organization, select the desired system to sign onto.Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language.

Option 2 - Using SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type:Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language.If necessary, click the System button, and select the desired system to sign onto.

Option 3 - SAP Logon:Enter the standard information used to log onto SAP.

4. Click OK.



7.23.2 SAP Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel. A link is available at the bottom of thetable to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

SAP Options:

SAP Logon INI Location When the SAP Adapter is not being used to log onto the database, keythe path or use the Browse button to select the location of the SAP logonINI file.

Language (SPRAS) Specify the language ID to be used for all descriptions.

Client Specify the SAP client number. This value is updated during signon.

Use SAP Login Dialog If selected, the standard SAP login procedure is used for signing ontoSpreadsheet Server. Otherwise, Global's standard Sign On toSpreadsheet Server dialog box is used.

Use SAP Adapter RFC's If selected, the connection process uses the standard SAP GUI signonprocess. Otherwise, direct connection to the database is used.

Limit Segment Lookup Resultsto nnnn Records

If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment valuelookup (i.e. when click the ellipse button for an account segment on theBuild a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number ofrecords specified.

Authorized Companies Displays a list of companies to which the current user is authorized. These values are updated during signon.

Currency Precisions Displays a list of each currency setup within SAP and its' applicablecurrency precision. These values are updated during signon.

Note: The Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP - Special Ledgers panel is used to maintain processing criteria for specialSAP ledgers. This panel is password protected. Contact Global for more information.


GL Reporting 195


7.23.3 SAP Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an SAP ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger. Valid values are FI, CO,COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Use the drop down list to selectthe appropriate value. After selecting a value, the system changes theaccount segments and valid currency types on the panel to match theselected ledger.

Currency Type Click the down arrow and select the currency type. Valid values varybased upon the ledger selected.

If ledger = FI, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, and GROUP. If ledger = CO or COOR, valid values are TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA,PV, TOTALQTY, and FIXEDQTY. If ledger = PCA, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, and QTY.




Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized. If left blank,the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator.



7.23.4 SAP GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a SAP ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Ledger","Currency Type","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:LedgerIdentifies the specific ledger in SAP. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers.

Currency TypeIdentifies the currency type.

Ledger Valid Values

FI TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP

CO TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY

COOR TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY

PCA TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, QTY

Key 3 Optionally identifies host configuration criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more thanone variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "CONFIGURATION=X" where X is either the full configuration name or just the number. If leftblank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator.










GL Reporting 197


Ledger Valid Segments

FI Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Account, Business Area

CO Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, CostCenter, Cost Element, Activity

COOR Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, OrderNumber, Cost Element

PCA Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Profit Center, FunctionArea, Controlling Area, Account

Type - valid values are 0 (Actual) and 1 (Plan)

Plan Version - use 000 if actual results are desired

Formula Example - FI Ledger - Using a Value List, Range and Mask:=GXL("FI","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","[1000,2000]","800000.859999","*")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for companies 1000 and 2000, accounts in the range of 800000 thru859999, and all business areas.

Formula Example - CO Ledger - Using Single Values:=GXL("CO","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","INT","000","DEM","01","1000","2000","435000","100")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for controlling area 1000, cost center 2000, cost element 435000and activity 100.


Formula Example - COOR Ledger - Using Single Values:=GXL("COOR","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2003","PER","2","1000","000","USD","01","1000","000000100000","0000000802")Retrieves the actual balance for period 2 of 2003 for controlling area 1000, order number 000000100000 and costelement 0000000802.

Formula Example - PCA Ledger - Using a Value List, Masks and a Range:=GXL("PCA","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2007","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","2000","9999","100","1000","800000")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 2007 for company 2000, profit centers 5000 and 9999, all function areas,range of controlling areas from 1000 thru 2500, and accounts that begin with 80.


GL Reporting 199


7.23.5 SAP GXD

For a SAP ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment (i.e. account, costcenter, internal order, profit center).

Syntax:=GXD("Descriptions","Parm 1","Parm 2","Parm 3")


Parameters:DescriptionsIdentifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account (ACCOUNT), Cost Center(CC), Internal Order (IO), and Profit Center (PC).

Parm 1If description is Account (ACCOUNT), identifies the chart of accounts. If description is Cost Center (CC) or Profit Center (PC), identifies the controlling area. If description is Internal Order (IO), then leave the field blank.

Parm 2Identifies the value of the account, cost center, order number, or profit center for which to retrieve the description.

Parm 3Optionally, identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the fullconfiguration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in theConfigurator.

Formula Example - Retrieve an Account Description:=GXD("ACCOUNT","INT","430000","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for account 430000 from the INT chart of accounts.


Formula Example - Retrieve a Cost Center Description:=GXD("CC","1000","1200","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for cost center 1200 from the 1000 controlling area.

Formula Example - Retrieve an Internal Order Description:=GXD("IO",,"702267","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for internal order 702267.

Formula Example - Retrieve a Profit Center Description:=GXD("PC","1000","1010","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for profit center 1010 from the 1000 controlling area.


Query 201


8 Query

Summary of Query Formulas for ExcelSpreadsheet Server retrieves data from the assigned database into Excel using the following formulas:

Formula Description

GEXQ Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet. This value may be "drilled down" upon to see the detailed results in a drill down panel or on aworksheet (see GEXQ Formulas).

GEXD Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).

GEXS Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas).

GEXI Opens the detail portion of the query and displays results in a drill down panel or on aworksheet (see GEXI Formulas).

Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See GL Reporting for GL related formulas.

These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions.

Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (seeFormula Assistant).

Setup Prior to using Query Formulas in Excel1. Queries must exist in Query Designer or Query Exchange before they can be used in formulas in Excel. Use one

of the following methods to create/add a query to Query Designer:Download a query from Query Exchange (see Download Queries from Query Exchange)Manually create a query in Query Designer (see Create a New Query)

2. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SServer menu, select Refresh Queries -or- select theribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system refreshes query data.


8.1 Build a Template for Queries

Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This toolpopulates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters as provided by the user. The tool inserts aGEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, or GEXI formula using the parameters.

Note: Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. See Build aTemplate for GL related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears (opening to thelast used formula/position/size).

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+B -or- by selecting the ribbon equivalent (seeSS Ribbon).


3. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXQ panel.

Field Description

GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query intothe spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas).

Query Name Click the Open From File button ( ) to navigate to and select the queryto be executed.

Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query tobe executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange).



Query 203


5. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXD panel.

Field Description

GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).



Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet.

Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be asingle cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected,then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data.

Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right ofthe results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number ofrecords in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill downformulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columnsare required to be on the first row following the headings. When IncludeColumn Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to beon the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place offill down columns (see GEXD Row Function).

Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula.Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clearrange to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell isA7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx").

Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings fromthe query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manuallyentered in Excel.

Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature ofExcel when the formula is executed.


Field Description

Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or therange or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is clearedwhen the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXDformula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data.

6. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXS panel.

Field Description

GEXS: Opens a selector panel based upon query results (see GEXS Formulas).



Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS.

Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s).

7. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXI panel.

Field Description

GEXI: Displays query detail in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas).



Query 205


8. Use the table to enter data in the bottom section of the Build a Template - GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panel.

Field Description

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the formula. Defaults the current active worksheet.

Starting Column/Row Specify the starting column and row for the formula template.

Use Absolute Cell References If selected, the system automatically locks both the column and rowvalues of the query's parameter cell references. If not selected, thesystem only locks the column value when the parameter is assigned to arow or the row value when the parameter is assigned to a column.

Line Description Specify a description to be assigned to the formula. This value is placed inthe cell prior to the cell containing the formula.

Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is cleared prior to inserting data.

Do Not Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is not cleared prior to inserting data.

Shift Worksheet Data If selected, the formula is inserted in the target cell and the parametercolumns and rows are inserted to the top and to the left of the existingworksheet data.

Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have beenspecified in the selected query definition.

Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula.

Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determinesif the query parameter will be located on the row to the left of the formula orin a column above the formula.

Value Key the value (i.e. single value, wildcard, list, range, or segment list) orclick the ellipse button to execute the user defined "look up" query toselect the value to default on the template for the query parameter (seeAssign Query).

9. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet, and keeps thepanel open for additional inserts.Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes thepanel.Close (button) -- closes the panel.


8.2 Formula Assistant for Queries

The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet.

Note: Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features. See FormulaAssistant for GL related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL or GEXQpanel -or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by pressing Shift+Ctrl+F -or- by selecting the toolbar or ribbonequivalent (see SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon).


Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual query parameters. However, if literal valuesare keyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes (").

Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references:On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field.Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up.On the worksheet, select the desired cell.Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field.

Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.

Query 207


3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel.

Field Description

GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query intothe spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas).





Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This areaassumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, soentering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of thefields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the downarrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the

formula.


4. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel.

Field Description

GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).











Query 209


5. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel.

Field Description

GEXS: Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas).







6. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel.

Field Description

GEXI: Opens the detail portion of the query and displays it in a drill down panel(see GEXI Formulas).




7. The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in theResults Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.

Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet andcloses the panel.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

Query 211


8.3 GEXQ Formula

The GEXQ formula is used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. Auser may drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results. The drill down results can appear in a singlepanel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's settings and how the drill down function is executed.

Note: A SHELL Statement may be added to the query to launch an external program in replace of query detail as partof the drill down (see SQL SHELL Function).

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside.

2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriateformula (GEXQ) on the Formulas fly out window.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SS Toolbar or SSRibbon).

3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel.

Field Description





Field Description



Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the

formula.

Example 1 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Query:See Create the GEXQ Field for more information on creating the GEXQ summary field in the Query Designer.

Example 2 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Formula Assistant:

Query 213


4. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the summary portion of the query in the GEXQ formula isimmediately executed. The true formula (GEXQ(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

5. Copy the GEXQ formula to the appropriate destination cells.

Note: If the GEXQ formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacentcolumn, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXQ formula to the same number of rowsgenerated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas).

6. To view detail records underlying an GEXQ summary value, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then rightclick and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServerMenu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the GEXQsummary value or the data is pushed to a worksheet.


8.4 GEXD Formula

The GEXD formula is used to directly insert the detail results of a query into a spreadsheet.

Note: See GEXD Limit to define the maximum the number of query output records in Excel.


2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriateformula (GEXD) on the Formulas fly out window.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel.

Field Description




Query 215


Field Description








4. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and a label (GenQueryDetail...) appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXD(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.


5. To generate detail reports for all GEXD formulas in the workbook, in Excel from the SServer menu select GenerateAll Detail Reports (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for all GEXD formulas areexpanded into the appropriate formatted sheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GEXD formula, select the cell containing the GEXD formula, right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The results for the selected GEXD formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

Query 217


8.4.1 GEXD Targeting a Cell

The following example demonstrates targeting a cell as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A7-G7 - represents the first row of output data.Cell H7 - identifies the fill down column formula (i.e. D7*.09).

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet7).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the starting cell for the output data (i.e. A7).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear a Range of Cells - indicates the area of output data to be cleared prior to executing the GEXD formula. Asthis example contain a fill down column (i.e. H7), the clear range starts on the second row of output data (i.e.A8:H500), allowing the fill down formula to remain for future executions of the GEXD.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).


3. The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

Query 219


8.4.2 GEXD Targeting a Range

The following example demonstrates targeting a range as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A7-G7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetRange.Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the rangewhen the GEXD is generated. This column MUST be directly to the right of the range.

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet5).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the range for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetRange).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXDformula. Selected in this example.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).

Query 221


8.4.3 GEXD Targeting a Table

The following example demonstrates targeting a table as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example:Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A6-H7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetTable.Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the rangewhen the GEXD is generated. This column is in the table.

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet6).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the table for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetTable).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXDformula. Selected in this example.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).

Query 223


8.5 GEXS Formula

The GEXS formula opens a selector panel with the values returned from the specified query. Selected values from thefirst column are then returned to Excel.

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside (typically adjacent to the Cell for Value).

2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriateformula (GEXS) on the Formulas fly out window.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel.

Field Description







4. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the specified Selector Text appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXS(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

5. To execute the GEXS formula, select the cell containing the GEXS formula, then right click and select SpreadsheetServer>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar or SS Ribbon). The Select Item panel appears.

6. Data in the list may be filtered, re-sorted and/or rearranged as necessary. To filter data -- enter a value in the appropriate column filter. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value. To re-sort data -- click the column heading to re-sort a column in ascending order. Click the column heading asecond time to re-sort the column in descending order. To move a column -- click and hold on the desired column header, then drag and drop the column right or left tothe desired position. Note: Column order is important, as only the first column of selected data will be inserted in the formula.

Query 225


7. On the Select Item panel, specify the appropriate Parameter Type and then select the desired value(s):To select a single value -- double click the value -or- select the value and click Insert Selected Value(s). Theselected value is returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected. Click the Insert Selected Value(s) button. The selected values are returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. To select multiple values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and thenselect the last value in the range. Click the Insert Selected Value(s) button. The selected values are returned tothe Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet.

Example 1: Multiple values for a field to be used by a Smart Parm are selected, and the Insert Selected Value(s) button isselected.


8.5.1 Explore

Similar to the GEXS formula, the Explore feature is used to open a selector panel with the values returned from thespecified query. Selected values from the first column are then returned to the active cell in Excel. The Explore featurediffers from a GEXS formula, as no actual formula resides on the spreadsheet. In addition, queries (EDQs) available forprocessing from the Explore feature must reside in a specific location.

To Setup:1. Ensure a folder labeled, Explore, exists in the root of the user's EDQ location.

2. In Query Designer, create the desired queries and save them in the Explore folder.

To Process:1. In Excel from the ribbon select Explore. The system lists the available queries located in the Explore folder.

Note: Only the first fifteen (15) queries located in the root of the Explore folder are listed.Only the first ten (10) sub-folders located in the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) queries located in a sub-folder are listed. No second level sub-folders are listed.

2. Navigate to and select the desired query. The Select Item panel appears.

3. On the Select Item panel, select the desired value(s) and click Insert Selected Value(s). The selected values arereturned to the active cell on the spreadsheet.

Query 227


8.6 GEXI Formula

The GEXI formula is used to display the detail results of a query. The results can appear in a single panel, tabbedpanel or worksheet based upon options in the user's settings and how the drill down function is executed.


2. From the SServer menu, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the appropriateformula (GEXI) on the Formulas fly out window.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel.

Field Description





4. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the GEXI indicator (i.e. ???) appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXI(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

Note: The GEXI indicator value used is determined by an application setting in the Configurator.

5. Copy the GEXI formula to the appropriate destination cells.

Note: If the GEXI formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacentcolumn, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXI formula to the same number of rowsgenerated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas).

6. To view detail records for the specified query, select the cell containing the GEXI formula, then right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SSToolbar or SS Ribbon). The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the query or the data ispushed to a worksheet.

Query 229



8.7 Download Queries from Query Exchange

Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online querydepository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. Query Exchange may beaccessed from within either Query Designer or Excel. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by auser setting in the Configurator.

Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component.

To Download a Query from Query Exchange:1. From within Query Designer:

In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens.

From within Excel:In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ,GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab.

Click the Search Online button ( ). Query Exchange opens.

2. Select and/or key the appropriate search criteria and click Search -orclick Advanced Search, enter theappropriate search criteria and click the Advanced Search button. The system lists all queries matching thesearch criteria.

Query 231


3. To download:

A single query -- click the Install Query icon ( ) next to the desired query. The Save As panel appears.Note: The Select a Connection panel appears prior to the Save As panel if the connection associated with the selected query does

not exist in the Configurator, allowing the user to select a connection to be assigned to the query.

Multiple queries -- select the appropriate check box(es) and click Download Selected Items. The Browse forFolder panel appears.

4. On the Save As or Browse for Folder panels, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change thefile name, then click Save or OK. The Query Retrieved panel appears confirming that the query(ies) has beensaved to Query Designer.

5. On the Query Retrieved panel, click OK. Query Exchange reappears, allowing the user to select another query fordownloading.

6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 as necessary to download additional queries.

7. When all queries have been downloaded, click the X to close Query Exchange.If Query Exchange was accessed from Query Designer, then Query Designer reappears and opens the lastquery downloaded via the Install Query icon.If Query Exchange was accessed from Build a Template or Formula Assistant panels in Excel, then the originalpanel reappears and defaults the name of the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon in the QueryName field.Note: Refer to GEXD Formulas, GEXQ Formulas, GEXI Formulas, and GEXS Formulas for the steps required to complete a

formula.


9 Query Designer

9.1 Query Designer Architecture

The Query Designer is a visual tool which allows the user to design, maintain, and run queries. The following chaptergives an overview of the various parts of the Query Designer, and describes the basic navigation.

1. From the desktop, select Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Query Designer. The QueryDesigner panel appears.

Query Designer 233


9.1.1 Ribbon Menu

The Query Designer's many functions are accessed via a Ribbon menu.


Globe Button: Menu used to create, open, close and save queries.

New Closes any open query and begins the process to create a new query(see Create a New Query).

Open Query Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere onthe network.

Close Query Closes the active query.

Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears (see Save the Query for the First Time).

Save As Saves the active query to a different target location and/or file name.

Exit Exits the Query Designer application.

Recent Documents Lists recent queries previously opened in the Query Designer. Click on aquery in the list to reopen the query.

Quick Access Toolbar:

Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere onthe network.

Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears.

Closes the active query.



Home Tab: Main menu used to maintain and execute queries.

Add Table Allows the user to add an available table from the current connection (see Add Tables).

Add Parameter Allows the user to define a parameter to be utilized as field criteria (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

GEXD Limit Specifies the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXDformula is generated (see GEXD Limit).

Change Connection Allows the user to change the connection for the selected query.

Definition Copies the open query definition to Notepad. This is useful fordocumenting queries (see Textual Query Definition).

Lib= Defines the library of the active query.

Un-Locked / Locked Locks or unlocks, based upon the current query status, the query toprevent modification of the query.

Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears.

Close Query Closes the active query.

All Records Executes the active query and returns all records. Note: Press F5 as a shortcut to execute all records for the query.

1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records.

Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record.

Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records.

Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query.

Abort Aborts the currently active executing query.

Explorer File System Displays queries located in the EDQ file repository directory location asdefined in the Settings (see Explorer File System Panel).

Query View Returns the top left panel to the open query's table view (see Query ViewPanel).

Publish Publishes the query to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange. The user is prompted to key a query description if one is not currentlyassigned. Global reviews all published queries prior to promoting them toQuery Exchange.

Search Online Goes to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange, allowing theuser to download queries to Query Designer (see Download Queries fromQuery Exchange).

Connection Tab: Menu used to manage active connections.

View Opens the Connections panel, allowing the user to view and testconnections to which the user is authorized (see Connections).


Disconnects all open connections.

Update Query Connections Opens the Update Query Connections panel, allowing the user to masschange the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection(see Update Query Connections).

Query Designer 235



File System Tab: Menu used to manage queries located in the EDQ file repository.Note: This menu is only available when the Explorer File System option isselected on the Home menu.

Clone Copies the selected query.

Delete Deletes the selected query.

Upgrade EDQs for File System Converts EDQ files from the Query Catalog to the Explorer File System.

View Tab: Menu used to modify QD settings, and to access Ad Hoc Queries andother reporting functions.

SQL Font Defines the font used in the SQL Text panel.

Font Size Defines the font size used in SQL Text panel.

Decrease Spacing Decreases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel.

Increase Spacing Increases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel.

Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Opens the Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel, allowing the user to viewpreexisting ad hocs (see Legacy Ad Hoc Queries).

Report Designer Opens the Report Designer panel, allowing the user to create and maintainuser designed reports.

View Report Previews query driven designed reports.

View Log File Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view information anderror log entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see QD View Log).

Settings Opens the Settings panel, allowing the user to defined various criteria tocontrol processing (see QD Settings).


9.1.2 Explorer File System Panel

The Explorer File System panel is a view of the default folder and subdirectories for EDQ files, and the query (EDQ)files located within the directories. An option in the SS Settings defines the default folder and an option in the QDSettings limits the fields displayed on the panel (see QD Settings).

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Explorer File System. The Explorer File System panel appears.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Explorer File System panel.

Field Description

Explorer File System ViewDirectory Tree

Displays the default folder and subdirectories for query (EDQ) files, asdefined in the SS Settings.

Name File name for the query (EDQ).

Description User defined query description.

Connection Connection used by the query.

SmartPak SmartPak grouping value for the query.

Size File size of the query.

Modified Date and time the query was last modified.

Modified By User ID of the last user who modified the query.

3. Use the table to reference available functions on the Explorer File System panel.


Open Query To open a query, double click the query name. The Query View panelappears (see Query View Panel).

Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of thecolumn header and drag to the desired width.

Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort in descending order, click the column heading a second time.

Query Designer 237


9.1.2.1 Query Menu

The Query menu is accessed from the Explorer File System panel, and allows the user to maintain, clone, or delete aquery.

1. On the Explorer File System panel panel, right click on the desired query. The Query pop-up menu appears.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Query popup menu.


Change Description Opens the Description panel, allowing the user to change the querydescription.

Clone Query Opens the Clone Query panel, allowing the user to enter the name to beassigned to the cloned query.

Remove Query Open the Delete File panel, allowing the user to confirm the deletion of thequery.

Assign SmartPak Opens the SmartPak panel, allowing the user to maintain the SmartPakgrouping value(s) associated with the query.

Explore Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and open a querywhich resides outside the default query location.


9.1.3 Query View Panel

The Query View panel is used to visually layout a query. Tables and relationships for the query are displayed in thispanel.

1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Query View panel appears for the selected query.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed from the Ribbon, by selecting Home>Query View.

2. Use the table for available functions on the Query View panel.


Add a Table Right click in any open gray space away from a relationship line, theTables panel appears allowing the user to select additional tables (see Add Tables).

Move a Table Drag the table header to another spot on the screen.

Re-size a Table Left click and drag on the blue box at the bottom right of the table.

Create a Relationship Click on a field from one table, then drag and drop it on the appropriatefield in another table (see Create Relationships).

Modify a Relationship Double click on a relationship line -or- select a relationship line and rightclick (see Create Relationships).

Select a Field Double click on a field to add it to the selected fields on the Field Listpanel (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).

Query Designer 239


9.1.3.1 Table Menu

The Table menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functionsassociated with the selected table.

1. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table pop-up menu appears. The options available on the Table menu vary based upon the query connection type.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table popup menu.


Change Database/Library For DSN, iSeries and SQL Server connection queries only, opens theSelect Library panel, allowing the user to select a different database/libraryfrom which to retrieve the table data. The newly selected database/libraryname appears in the table header section.

Change Schema For Oracle connection queries only, opens the Change Schema panelallowing the user to specify a different schema for the table.

Change Table Owner For SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Change Table Ownerpanel allowing the user to specify a different owner for the table.

Refresh Field Names fromDatabase

Updates the fields listed for the table.

Set Table Alias For all connection queries except SAP, opens the Table Alias panelallowing the user to enter an alias name for the table.

Remove Table Removes the table and any associated relationships and selected fieldsfrom the query.


9.1.4 Parameters Panel

The Parameters panel is used to maintain parameters for the query. Test values may be assigned to the parameters,enabling the user to test a query directly in the Query Designer prior to using it in Excel. Criteria assigned toparameters also controls drill down sub query processing and the listing of valid values in Build a Template.

1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Parameters panel appears for the selected query.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Parameters panel.

Field Description

ID System assigned parameter ID number.

Description Parameter description, generally the field name.

Test Value Default test parameter value.

Sub Query Column Column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column nameswhen determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associateddrill down (see Sub Query Column).

Assign Query Query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build aTemplate panel (see Assign Query).

3. Use the table to reference available functions on the Parameters panel.


Add a Parameter To add a new parameter, click the Add button. The Add a Parameterpopup panel appears (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

Edit a Parameter To modify a parameter, click in the desired field and a blinking cursorappears allowing changes.

Save Changes To save a change to an existing parameter, click the Save button.

Delete a Parameter To delete an existing parameter, click the Del button.

Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to thedesired location.

Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of thecolumn header and drag to the desired width.

Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort in descending order, click the column heading a second time

Query Designer 241


9.1.5 Field List Panel

The Field List panel displays the fields included in the query and the field attributes that will be utilized to retrieve thedata. In addition, the panel displays information as to how the data will be grouped, sorted, displayed and selected.

1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Field List panel appears for the selected query.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Field List panel.

Field Column Description

Type Type of field. Valid types are T (text), N (numeric), D (date), B (Boolean)and U (unknown).

Field Name Field name from the source table. In addition, an alias name may beassigned to the field. The alias name appears in front of the actual fieldname.

Example: Field name is CNME and the alias name is Customer Name.

Totals Indicates how the field is being grouped (totaled). This column onlyappears when the Totals function is being used (see Create a TotalsQuery.

Table Name Source table from which the field is being retrieved. The value "(none)"appears for a calculated field.

Sort Type Indicates whether or not to use the field for sorting, and how to sort thefield. Valid values are (none), Ascending, and Descending.

Sort Order Indicates the order by which the query data will be sorted. The field withthe lowest number is the first sort key.

Visible Indicates whether or not the field will be visible in the query output. Bydefault all fields are visible. De-selecting the option for a selected field willallow the field to be used as selection criteria, but not included in the queryoutput.

Criteria 1 - 6 Selection criteria (i.e. specific values, parameters, expressions) to be usedwhen retrieving query data. Criteria entered vertically in the same columnare combined with a logical AND. Criteria entered horizontally across

columns are combined with a logical OR. Click the ellipse button ( ) forthe appropriate field to access the Builder for entering criteria expressions(see Builder Panel).


9.1.5.1 Field List Menu

The Field List Menu is accessed from the Field List panel, and allows the user to access/process various functionsassociated with selected query fields.

1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Field List popup menu.


Totals Toggles to display or hide the Group By column (see Create a TotalsQuery).

Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thusremoving duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique.

GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQField).

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field(see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Field Descriptions asAliases

Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions fromthe table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Smart Parm for This Field Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see SmartParms in the Query Designer).

Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables andparameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields).

Edit Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel for a selected calculated field (see Create/EditCalculated Fields).

Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is todrag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location.

Delete Field Deletes the selected field from the query.

Query Designer 243


9.1.5.2 Builder Panel

The Builder is used to enter query criteria or create calculated fields. The Builder panel may be accessed from the Field Listpanel by:

Selecting the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields.Selecting a field, right clicking and selecting Add Calculated Field -or- Edit Calculated Field (see Create/Edit CalculatedFields).

Builder Operation ButtonsOperation buttons are provided on the Builder panel to assist the user in building expressions.


Builder Functional ButtonsAdditional functional buttons are available on the Builder panel.

Button Function

iSeries, Oracle, SQL ServerTabs:

Each tab has specific features to support the appropriate server. Not allfeatures are available on each tab.

Current Date Inserts the expression for the current date into the query.

CASE Builder Open the Case Builder panel, allowing the user to create a case statementand push it into the Builder panel (see Use the CASE Builder).

90 Days Ago Inserts the (CURRENT DATE - 90 DAYS) expression. The "- 90" may thenbe changed to a different value.

TRIM (<expr>) Trims leading and trailing blanks.

In ('x','x') Inserts an IN expression (valid if field criteria is in a comma-delimited list).

Date Conversion Click the down arrow and select the original format of the date field to beconverted. The system then inserts the selected date field into anexpression that converts the field into an actual Date Type field.

YYDDD - Julian date format used by InfiniumCYYDDD - Julian date format used by JD EdwardsYYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack HenryYYYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS

Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above.

Salesforce Tab: Refer to Salesforce documentation for more information regarding datefunctions and date literals.

Today Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for 24 hours.

Last_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for the last 90 days.

Last_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe current day and continues for the last n days. The "30" may then bechanged to a different value.

Last_N_Weeks:2 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe last day of the previous week and continues for the last n weeks. The"2" may then be changed to a different value.

Next_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for the next 90 days.

Next_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, for which the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe current day and continues for the next n days. The "30" may then bechanged to a different value.

This_Year Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 on January 1 of the currentyear and continues through the end of December 31 of the current year.

Calendar_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendarmonth for the selected date field.

Calendar_Quarter Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendarquarter for the selected date field.

Calendar_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendaryear for the selected date field.

Query Designer 245


Button Function

Day_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day inthe month for the selected date field.

Day_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day inthe year for the selected date field.

Week_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week inthe month for the selected date field.

Week_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week inthe year for the selected date field.

Misc Tab:

%GEXDROW% Replaces the ROW number of the Excel row when used as detail results ina GEXD formula (see GEXD Row).

COALESCE Converts null values to the value specified in the function (the default is 0).

%USER% Replaces the username in the connection to the data.

Logic Click the down arrow to access additional %IF and %LOOP functions.

Simple Loop Inserts loop statement, allowing the query to loop through fields andsummarize them based on user defined parameters for the loop counter. The loop will continue to process from the first counter until it hits thesecond counter.

Loop Count Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT%.

Loop Count NN Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT2%. The "2" may then be changed toa different number to indicate the number of characters/digits to display forthe value.

Simple IF Inserts a basic IF-THEN-ELSE statement which the user can then modifyas necessary.

%WINDOWSUSER% Replaces the Windows User ID when executing the query.

Custom Buttons Performs user defined function (see Custom Buttons).

Get Values Retrieves each distinct value of a selected field (see Get Values).

CommentsReference the following for entering comments on the Builder panel. Comments must be on a separate line.

Connection Type Comment Syntax

Access Comments are not supported.

DSN DSN owner should know whether or not comments are supported.

iSeries /*this is a comment*/

Oracle /*this is a comment*/

SAP Comments are not supported.

SQL Server Two dashes then the comment text (i.e. --this is a comment)


9.1.5.2.1 Custom Buttons

The Builder panel contains two custom buttons. The user defines the function to occur when each button is selected.

To Maintain Custom Buttons:

1. On the Builder panel Misc tab, click the Edit Custom Buttons button ( ). The Customize Builder panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Customize Builder panel.

Field Description

Button to Customize Click the down arrow and select which custom button to modify.

Display Text Specify the label to appear on the custom button.

Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to appear for the custom button.

Preview Displays how the custom button will appear.

Assigned Function Specify the function to occur or the expression to be inserted into theBuilder when the custom button is selected.

Button Function

Clear Button Assignment Clears the text, tool tip and assigned function values previously assignedto the custom button.

3. Click OK. The system updates the custom button on the Builder panel.

Query Designer 247


9.1.6 SQL Text Panel

The SQL Text panel displays the SQL text to be executed for both a detail query and a GEXQ (summary query).

Auto Generate ModeBy selecting the Auto Generate check box (the default) the application continually updates the text to reflect changesmade in the visual layout.

Manual ModeIf desired, SQL text may be manually entered or the auto-generated SQL text may be manually modified. For example,manual entry is required for establishing a SHELL to process an external program (see SQL SHELL Function).

1. De-select the Auto Generate check box. A popup panel appears.

2. On the popup panel, specify whether or not to copy the auto-generated SQL text. The Auto Generate label is setto red, indicating in manual mode.

Yes -- leaves any previously auto-generated SQL text in the SQL text box.No -- clears all data from the SQL text box.

3. Toggling back and forth from auto-generate to manual mode, the system saves the changes for the life of the query. When the query is saved the text that is currently displayed in the SQL text box will be the executed SQLstatement.


9.2 QD Settings

Query Designer (QD) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the optionsdefine processing for all users on the PC; however, the option Show EDQ Detail is defined for each individual user.

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select View>Settings. The Settings - General panel appears.


Field Description

Show EDQ Detail If selected, all query related fields are displayed on the Explorer FileSystem panel. If not selected, only query name, size and modified date/time are displayed thus reducing retrieval time.

Auto-Alias Fields If selected, the field description is automatically assigned as the aliaswhen a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, thenthe field name is assigned as the alias (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Note: This function does not apply to calculated fields.

Include SAP "AS" Alias For SAP queries only, if selected the SQL statement is built such thataliases are identified as "AS alias name". This option must be selected inorder to sort grouped queries. When this option is selected, specialcharacter restrictions are enforced for SAP alias names.

Results Grid Render Right to Left If selected, text on the ResultsContainer panel is right justified.

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see QD View Log). Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, email or clear the log file.

Query Designer 249


Button Function

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and errorlog entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see QDView Log).

3. The File Locations panel displays the location of various files utilized in Query Designer. These file locations aredefined in user's SS Settings.


4. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Query Designer. To email

this information to the helpdesk, click the Email button. The system opens a new Outlook® email panel with thecontents of this panel in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body asnecessary and click the Send button.

5. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel.

Query Designer 251


9.3 Connections

A database connection must be created in order to process Query Designer queries (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXIformulas or sub queries). All connections are created and maintained in the Configurator. In Query Designerconnections may be viewed and/or tested.

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Connection>View. The Connections panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Connections panel.

Field Description

Available Connections Displays a list of connections available for use in Query Designer to whichthe user is authorized. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load localconnections.

Host If applicable, displays the server name or IP address.

Database If applicable, displays the database -or- for Oracle databases displays theSID and Port values.

User Name Displays the user name to be used to test the database connection. Thevalue may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input.

Password Displays the password to be used to test the database connection. Thevalue may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input

Button Function

Test Displays a message in the Results field indicating whether or not theconnection was successful.

3. To test a connection, select the connection from the list and click the Test button. A message appears in theResults field indicating whether or not the connection was successful.


9.3.1 Update Query Connections

The Update Query Connections function is used to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a newconnection.

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Connection>Update Query Connections. The Update QueryConnections panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Update Query Connections panel.

Field Description

Original Connection From the list of connections, select the connection to be updated. Thesystem displays the selected connection in the All Queries UsingConnection section on the panel.

Available Connections From the list of connections available for use in Query Designer, select theconnection to be assigned to the queries associated with the originalconnection. The system displays the selected connection in the Will NowUse Connection section on the panel.Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load localconnections.

3. Click OK. The system updates the appropriate queries, replacing the original connection with the new connection.

Query Designer 253


9.4 Create a New Query

Use the following steps to create a new query.

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select the Globe button>New. The Query Name and Connection panelappears.

2. On the Query Name and Connection panel, specify a unique name and description (optional) for the query, andselect which connection to use, then click OK. Based upon the setup of the connection either a Login panel or theTables panel appears.

Note: For SAP connections only, the Tables panel appears instead of the Login panel. After the user enterssearch criteria and clicks the Search button then the appropriate Logon panel appears.

3. If necessary, on the Login panel enter the appropriate data (i.e. user ID and password), and click Login. TheTables panel appears.

4. Proceed to the next step, Add Tables.


9.5 Save the Query for the First Time

It is recommended to save frequently during query creation/editing. The initial save of a query functions differently thanwhen an existing query is saved.

1. In Designer Query from the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. The Save As panel appears positioned to thedefault folder for EDQ files and the File Name is highlighted.

Nav Tip:This function may also be processed by selecting the Globe button menu or Quick Access Toolbarequivalent (see Ribbon Menu).

2. On the Save As panel, if necessary navigate to a different folder location.

Note: DO NOT change the file name at this time (this includes changing the case of individual characters). If thequery name needs to be changed it may be done later using the clone function.

3. Click the Save button. The system saves the query file (.EDQ), and a confirmation panel appears.

4. Click OK.

Query Designer 255


9.6 Add Tables

New QueryWhen creating a new query, the first task is to select the tables (files) required for the query. After logging into adatabase, the Tables panel appears listing tables from the database assigned to the applicable connection or specifiedon the previous Login panel.

Note: For SAP connections only, the Tables panel does not initially list any tables. To list tables, enter search criteria(criteria for Description is case sensitive), click the Search button, and enter login data.

Existing QueryTo add a table to an existing query, in Query Designer from the Ribbon select Home>Add Table.

To Add Table(s) to a Query:1. Use the table to enter data on the Tables panel.

Field Description

Library For iSeries or SQL Server connections, click the down arrow and selectthe library from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. The value &Lib defaults indicating to use the database library specified onthe Login panel.

Data Type For Oracle connections only, click the down arrow and select the typefrom which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. Valid typesare Synonyms, Tables, and Views.

Search For Specify a name or description in order to search for the desired table.For non-SAP connections, each character typed filters the list. For SAP connections only, after criteria is keyed click the Search button.

File Name / Description For SAP connections only, select the appropriate check boxes to indicateto apply the search criteria to the file name and/or description.


2. To add tables to the Favorites list, from the All tab on the Tables panel, select the desired table(s) and click Add toFavorites. The selected tables turn green and are added to the Favorites tab.

Note: Any subsequent time the Tables panel is displayed for the associated connection, the Favorites tab defaultsreducing load time.

3. To select table(s) for a query, from the Tables panel:To select a single table -- double click the table -or- select the table and click the Add button. The table isadded and the Query View panel appears. To select multiple tables -- press and hold the Ctrl key as tables are selected. Click the Add button. The tablesare added and the Query View panel appears.To select multiple tables in a range -- select the first table in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last table in the range. Click the Add button. The tables are added and the Query View panel appears.

4. To add another table to the query, from the Ribbon select Home>Add Table -or- right click in any open gray spaceon the Query View panel. The Tables panel appears. Repeat step 3 until all tables have been selected.

5. If the database environment has been changed (i.e. by the installation of a new version or maintenance fix of the

ERP software that includes table additions or restructures), click the Refresh List from Database button ( ) torefresh the view of tables. The system re-reads the database schema, refreshes the tables listed and theirstructures.

6. If more than one table was selected for the query, then proceed to the next step, Create Relationships. If only onetable was selected, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

Query Designer 257


9.7 Create Relationships

If more than one table is selected in query, it is necessary to create a relationship or join between the tables.

To Create a Relationship Between Two Tables:1. On the Query View panel, drag and drop a field from one table to the corresponding field in another table. The

system will draw a line indicating which fields are joined.

Below the left mouse was dragged from the F0411.RPAN8 field and dropped on the F0101.ABAN8 field.

2. If necessary, repeat step 1 to create additional joins which may be needed to create the appropriate one-to-one orone-to-many relationship between tables.

3. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

To Modify Relationship Properties:1. On the Query View panel, double click the line connecting the two tables -or- select the relationship line and right

click. The Relationship Properties panel appears.


2. Use the table to enter data on the Relationship Properties panel.

Field Description

Left Table In special cases, use the Left Table section to modify the field in the lefttable to adhere to SQL rules. Example 1: To join a text field to a numeric field a SQL command mustbe entered to convert the numeric field to a text field (i.e CHAR(<field>)).

Right Table In special cases, use the Right Table section to modify the field in the righttable to adhere to SQL rules. See Example 1 above for the Left Tablesection.

Joined Fields Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join relationship isselected, which includes only rows where the joined fields from both tablesare the same. Additional options are available to join all records from theleft table and only records in the right table where the joined fields match,or to join all records from the right table and only records in the left tablewhere the joined fields match.

Trim Both Fields If selected, the system trims (removes leading blanks) for both of thejoined fields.

3. To delete the selected join relationship, click the Delete Relation button -or- to delete all relationships in the query,click the Delete All Relationships button.

4. Once all changes are made, click OK.

5. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

Query Designer 259


9.8 Select or Create Query Fields

Fields should be added to a query in the following general order:

1. Add fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).

2. Add table field descriptions as aliases (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

3. Add calculated fields (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields).

4. Rename any fields as desired (see Assign Aliases to Fields).


9.8.1 Fields Used Direct from Source Table

Use the following steps to add fields to the query that are to be used directly (as-is) from selected source tables.

1. On the Query View panel, double click the desired field from a table -or- drag and drop the field to the Field Listpanel.

In the example below fields RPAN8 and ABALPH were selected.

2. Repeat step 1 until all of the fields that are to be used "as-is" have been selected.

3. To search for a field, enter the field name or description in the Search field. Each character typed filters thesearch. For example, to find the Vendor Invoice Number field enter the word "invoice" in the search field. All fieldscontaining the word "invoice" are filtered in the table. Clear the Search field to remove the filter.

Query Designer 261


9.8.2 Assign Aliases to Fields

As field names from tables may be nondescript and confusing, assigning an alias name to a field assists in clarifyingwhat the field is. There are three ways to assign aliases to fields. When assigning aliases to fields, it is important asto when each method may be used to assign aliases to fields.

Auto-Alias Fields -- If the Auto-Alias Fields option is selected in Settings, then the system automatically assignsthe field description as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, then the fieldname is assigned as the alias. This function does not apply to calculated fields.

Add Field Descriptions as Aliases -- The system creates aliases for each field in the query using the fielddescriptions from the table schema. Generally this option is used immediately after all fields that are to be useddirectly (as-is) from the source tables have been added to the query. Once a calculated field has been added, thismethod for assigning aliases is no longer available.

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) -- Allows the user to manually assign or modify an alias field name to a selected field. Generally this option is used after any calculated fields have been added.

Note: For SAP connection only, aliases may not contain special characters.

To Add Field Descriptions as Aliases:1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Field Descriptions as Aliases. The system uses the field descriptionsfrom the table schema to assign aliases to each field in the query.

Note:This function replaces any aliases assigned via the Alias (... AS nnnnn) function.This function is not available after a calculated field has been added to the query.


To Manually Assign or Modify a Single Alias -- Alias (... AS nnnnnn ):1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears (see above).

2. On the Field List popup menu, select Aliases (...AS nnnnnn). The Modify Alias panel appears.

3. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias value and click OK. The system assigns the alias field name tothe selected field.

Example:

BEFORE aliases have been assigned (and before calculated fields have been added).

AFTER Add Field Descriptions as Aliases has been processed.

AFTER Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) has been processed for RPAN8, ABALPH and RPDOC.

Note: When using an Access connection aliases are delimited by brackets instead of double quotes.

Query Designer 263


9.8.3 Create/Edit Calculated Fields

A calculated field is a field that is created instead of pulled directly from a source table. Use the following steps tobegin the process to create a new calculated field or to modify an existing calculated field.

Note: For SAP connections only, calculated fields are limited to basic arithmetic functions add (+), subtract (-),multiply (*) and divide (/), and signs must be bounded by spaces (i.e. X + Y, not X+Y).

To Create a New Calculated Field:1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears.

3. All calculated fields are defined in this panel (see Select Fields from a Table, Create Date Fields, Use the CASEBuilder, GEXD Row, and Get Values).

To Edit an Existing Calculated Field:1. On the Field List panel, right click on the calculated field that requires editing. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. On the Field List popup menu, select Edit Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears.

3. On the Builder panel, make any necessary changes and click OK.

4. Additional changes may be made to a calculated field on the Field List panel, such as changing the field type orassigning an alias field name (see Field List Panel and Assign Aliases to Fields).


9.8.3.1 Select Fields from a Table

Often files do not store data in the form which is desired, but various fields in the file may be combined (i.e. added orsubtracted) to obtain the desired result. The Builder may be used to create an expression using fields directly fromsource tables to obtain the desired value.

Example - Calculate the Amount Paid for an Invoice:Calculate the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount (RPAAP) from the gross invoice amount (RPAG).

1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list ofselected source tables.

2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table.

3. From the Field Listings panel, double click the desired field (RPAG in this example). The selected value<lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

4. In the work area, enter any math symbols by typing them -or- by clicking the appropriate operation button (ifavailable) (a minus sign in this example).

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary until the expression is complete (RPAAP was selected in this example).

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom ofthe list.

Query Designer 265


7. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias(AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field andclick OK.


9.8.3.2 Create Date Fields

Occasionally date fields in the source tables are not in a true date format as recognized by Excel. When this occurs itmay be necessary to convert the field value to a date format.

Below are samples of date fields in other formats (C = century, YY = year, MM = month, DD = day):YYDDD - Julian date format used by InfiniumCYYDDD - Julian date format used by JDEYYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack HenryYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS

Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above.

Query Designer provides a Date Conversion option on the Builder panel to convert these formats into true date formats.

Example - Converting a JDE Julian Date to a True Date Calculated Field:Convert the AP invoice date field (RPDIVJ), a Julian date field in JDE, to a true date calculated field. In this scenario,the host system is an iSeries (AS/400).



3. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example).

4. On the iSeries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CYYDDD. Theconversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Query Designer 267



6. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias(AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field(Invoice Date in this example) and click OK.

7. Sample query results.

Note: OLEDB iSeries connections display dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, where as ODBC connections displaydates as MM/DD/YYYY.


9.8.3.3 Use the CASE Builder

The Builder provides a tool to aid in constructing CASE statements. CASE statements may be used as calculatedfields or as selection criteria.

Note: For SAP connections only, CASE statements are not applicable.

Example - Build a CASE Statement:Look for null (or zero) AP invoice dates (RPDIVJ) and replace them with a predefined date to prevent errors, and thenconvert the remaining dates, to a true date calculated field.

1. On the Builder panel iSeries tab, click the CASE Builder button. The Case Builder panel appears.

2. In the WHEN field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the WHEN field to select a fieldfrom a table (the Builder button is being used in this example).

Query Designer 269


3. In this example a single field is being selected from a source table (see Select Fields from a Table). On the Builderpanel:

Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables.Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example).Select (double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in thework area on the Builder panel.

4. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression (&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ in this example) is pushed to WHEN field onthe CASE Builder panel.

5. On the CASE Builder panel, use the drop down list to select the appropriate expression operator (equal (=) in thisexample). A new field appears to the right of the Expression Operator field.

6. In the new field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the new field to select a field from a


table (zero (0) has been keyed in this example).

7. In the THEN field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the THEN field to select a fieldfrom a table (DATE('01/01/1900') has been keyed in this example).

8. Click the ADD Expression button. This starts the CASE statement in the CASE Builder work area.

9. If additional WHEN expressions are required, then edit the WHEN and THEN fields as necessary. When therevised expression is complete, click the ADD Expression button again. The revised expression is added to thecurrent CASE statement in the work area. Repeat this process for as many fields as necessary for the CASEstatement.

10. In the ELSE field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the ELSE field to select a field

from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example).

11. In this example a Julian date is being selected and converted to a true date field (see Create Date Fields). On theBuilder panel:

Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables.Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example).Select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example).On the iSeries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CCYYDDD. Theconversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Query Designer 271


12. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression is pushed to the ELSE field on the CASE Builder panel.

13. Click the ADD Else button. The else expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area.


14. Click the Done button. The completed CASE statement appears the original Builder work area.


16. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias(AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field andclick OK.

Query Designer 273


9.8.3.4 GEXD Row

The Builder functional button, %GEXDROW%, is used to return the Excel row number for each row of data when theGEXD is generated in Excel. This function may be used to create a calculated field, and may remove the need of usingfill down columns in Excel.

Note: Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, the expression %EXDROW% was used instead of %GEXDROW%. Thesystem continues to support the legacy %EXDROW% expression.

Example - Using GEXD Row Function to Create a Calculated Field:Use the GEXD Row function to create a calculated field which will calculate/report the amount paid by subtracting theopen invoice amount column from the gross invoice amount column in Excel.

Initial Set Up:1. Create a new query, retrieving gross invoice amount and open invoice amount (see below).

To Add a Calculated Field using the GEXD Row Function:1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and Select Add a Calculated Field on the Field List popup menu. The

Builder panel appears.

2. In the work area on the Builder panel, enter the appropriate to build the expression. In this example the followinghas been entered:

Type ' (a single quote).From the operation buttons, click = (Equal).Type D (capital letter D).From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%.From the operation buttons, click - (Minus).Type E (capital letter E)From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%.Type ' (a single quote).



4. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel right click on the field and select Alias(AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field(Amount Paid) and click OK.

5. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query.

6. From the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record to execute the query. The ResultsContainer panel appearsdisplaying one record.

7. In Excel, create a GEXD formula with the following values (see Create and Use GEXD formulas).Select the query name identified in step 5.Specify the target worksheet.Type the Starting Cell/Range/Table.Select to Include Headings.Specify the cell reference for the Smart Parm.

8. Select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This DetailReport (GEXD) -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The %GEXDROW% creates a calculation,subtracting column E from column D, for all rows included in the generated data output. This functions similar tothe GEXD fill down columns feature.

Query Designer 275


9.8.3.5 Get Values

The Builder provides a Get Values button to display a list of the existing field values for a selected field. From the list,values may be selected and used as arguments/criteria in a variety of Builder functions.

Example - Using Get Values in an IN( ) Statement:Add selection criteria to only retrieve records where Line Number (RPLNID) equals 10000, 11000 or 13000.

1. On Field List panel for the desired field (RPLNID in this example), click the ellipse button located in one of theseven criteria fields. The Builder panel appears.



4. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPLNID in this example).

5. Click the Get Values button. The system displays a list of existing field values for the selected field.

Note: Increase or decrease the font size of listed values by click ing the or buttons.


6. Select the desired field value(s):To select a single value -- select the value. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected on the list.To select values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the lastvalue in the range.

Note: Double click ing a value in the list pushes the value directly to the Builder expression work area. Single clickthe value when an additional function is to be applied to the value before pushing it into the work area.

7. Select the desired function button. In this example the selected values (10000, 11000 and 13000) are beinginserted into an IN( ) statement, so the IN ('x','x') button is clicked. The IN statement using the selected valuesappears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Note: The IN ('x','x') button causes all arguments to be entered as text values (in single quotes). If the field isnumeric, then manually remove the quote marks.

8. When the expression is complete, click OK.

Query Designer 277


9.9 Add Criteria

9.9.1 Hard Coded Criteria

Field selection criteria may be hard coded. These hard coded values may not be altered at query run time (i.e. inExcel). Hard coded criteria may be entered directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Example of hardcoded criteria would be "Open Amount <> 0" or "Status = Active".

To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Field List Panel:1. On the Field List panel, click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field and manually key the

selection criteria (<>) in this example).

To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Builder Panel:1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the

desired field. The Builder panel appears.

2. On the Builder panel, selection criteria may be keyed directly in the work area or by using the appropriate operationor functional buttons to develop the expression.

3. When the expression is complete, click OK.


9.9.2 Create and Use Parameters

9.9.2.1 Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel

Parameters are added to a query as a place-holder for when selection criteria is to be specified in Excel. A defaultparameter value may be defined in the query for testing purposes, and then the actual criteria is specified in Excel atthe time the formula is executed.

Query DesignerWhen a query is created or modified, it is normal to execute the query in Query Designer to test the results. Whentesting a query parameter values are specified in the Parameters panel (see Parameters Panel).

ExcelQuery Designer queries are executed from Excel via formulas (GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, GEXI). Each of these formulashave arguments where parameter values may be specified. These values may be hard-coded in the formula definition;however, it is recommended to use cell references.

Query Designer 279


9.9.2.2 Standard Parameters in the Query Designer

Standard Parameters allow the user full control over how the system interprets a parameter. When using standardparameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and rangesof values.

Note: Standard Parameters differ from Smart Parms. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules forprocessing parameters (see Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules and Smart Parms in the Query Designer).

To Create a Parameter:1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Add a Parameter panel.

Field Description

Parameter Description Specify a description for the parameter.

Test Value Specify the default value to be used for the parameter.

Sub Query Column If required, click the ellipse button ( ) to access the Select Sub QueryColumn panel for selecting the column name to be used for matching todrill down panel column names when determining whether the query is avalid sub query for the associated drill down (see Sub Query Column).

Assign Query If required, click the down arrow and select the query to be used for listingvalid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel (see AssignQuery.

3. Click Save. The new parameter appears on the Parameters panel.


To Insert a Parameter into a Criteria Field:1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the

desired field. The Builder panel appears.

2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands thelist of available parameters.

3. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used.

4. Double click <value as (number or string)>. The parameter, &PARM01, appears in the work area on the Builderpanel.

5. Enter any comparison operators and other characters as necessary to complete the criteria expression (i.e.=&PARM01).

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the parameter inserted in the selected criteria field.

Query Designer 281


9.9.2.3 Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules

When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numericvalues, lists and ranges of values. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processingparameters. The rules used by Smart Parms are similar to those used in Global's Spreadsheet Server products forspecifying segment values.

Below is a comparison by example of SQL (iSeries DB2) rules for specifying criteria values used by standardparameters versus Smart Parms.

Criteria Type Standard Parameters Smart Parms

Single Value - Text ='ABC' ABC

Single Value - Numeric =123 123

Single Value - Date =DATE('01/01/2007') 1/1/2007

Mask (wildcard) LIKE 'A%' A*

Mask (wildcard) for All Values LIKE '%' * or a blank

Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value LIKE '_500' *500

Range - Text BETWEEN 'ABC' AND 'DEF' ABC.DEF

Range - Numeric BETWEEN 123 AND 456 123.456

Range - Date BETWEEN DATE('01/01/2007')AND DATE('03/31/2007')

1/1/2007.3/31/2007

Value List - Text IN('A','B','C') [A,B,C]

Value List - Numeric IN(1,2,3) [1,2,3]

Value List with Exclude N/A [AAA.CCC,/BBB]Note: May not exclude a segment list

Field is Blank N/A BLANK

Field is Not Blank N/A NOTBLANK

Greater Than or Equal To >=1000 1000.99999999

Less Than or Equal To <=1000 -99999999.1000

Logical NOT (using alphabet asdataset)

NOT IN('A','B','C') [D.Z]

Segment List(see Create/Maintain SegmentLists)

N/A ^Country

@ Field (see Note) N/A @alias:value -or- @fieldname:value-or- @table.fieldname:value(i.e. @Company:001)Note: Alias as defined in theConfigurator

Note: An @ Field allows for using different fields in the file as criteria for retrieving data without having to change the query.

With Smart Parms no comparison operators are used (=,<>,<,>,BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT).

The Smart Parm routine actually converts the expression to one that uses SQL rules.

mailto:@table.fieldname:value


9.9.2.4 Smart Parms in the Query Designer

Smart Parms may be added to a field directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel.

Note: Prior to adding a Smart Parm to a field an alias name must be assigned to the field (see Assign Aliases toFields).

To Add Smart Parms via the Field List Panel:1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. On the Field List popup menu, select Add Smart Parm for This Field. A parameter for the field is added to theParameter panel with a blank value, and the Smart Parm (&SPARM01) is inserted into the Criteria 1 field.

To Add Smart Parms via the Builder Panel:Note: This method must be used to add Smart Parms in other Criteria fields besides Criteria 1.

1. If the parameter doesn't already exist, create it (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

2. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for thedesired field. The Builder panel appears.

3. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands thelist of available parameters.

4. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used.

5. Double click <value as smart parm>. The Smart Parm appears in the work area on the Builder panel. No othersupporting characters (i.e. =, <, >) are required.

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the Smart Parm inserted in the selected criteria field.

Query Designer 283


To Delete Smart Parms:Note: If multiple Smart Parms exist for a query, only the last (highest number) Smart Parm in the list may be deleted.

Example: Have Smart Parms 1, 2 and 3. Smart Parm 3 may be deleted; however, Smart Parm 2 may not bedeleted unless Smart Parm 3 is first deleted.

1. In the Parameters panel, select the highest number Smart Parm and click Del. The system displays aconfirmation panel. Click OK. The system removes the Smart Parm from the Parameters panel.

2. On the Field List panel, click the associated Smart Parm criteria field value. The Builder panel appears. Deletethe Smart Parm field value. Click OK. The system removes the criteria field value from the Field List.

3. Repeat the steps above to delete additional Smart Parms.


9.9.2.5 Parameters in Excel

Parameters are used in Excel in conjunction with query formulas to provide criteria for the query being executed.

To Use Parameters in Excel:1. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SServer menu, select Refresh Queries -or- select the

ribbon equivalent (see SS Ribbon). The system refreshes query data.

2. Layout the Excel report and assign cell references for each parameter.

3. Position the cell pointer to where the Query Designer formula is to go.

4. Open the Formula Assistant, assign values to the arguments, including the cell positions of the parameters.

5. Click the Insert button to save the formula into the cell.

6. To change the query criteria value, enter the new value in the cell designated and re-run the query.

Query Designer 285


9.9.3 Sub Query Column

On drill down panels in Query Designer and Spreadsheet Server, a Sub Queries option exists allowing the user to drilldown from the current drill down panel to a user-defined query. The Sub Queries submenu contains a list of all theEDQ files that have column names in the Sub Query Column parameter field matching column names on the originaldrill down panel.

Note: All Sub Query Columns defined in the detail query must be present on the original drill down panel for query to beavailable on the Sub Queries menu.

To Create Sub Query:1. Create the related detail query(ies) (AR Customer Master Data.edq and AR Customer Sales Summary.edq in this

example) to be associated with the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query (AR Sales Summary.edq inthis example).

2. For each related detail query on the Parameters panel, click the ellipse button in the Sub Query Column for theappropriate parameter. The Select Sub Query Column panel appears.

3. Select the folder or subdirectory for which to list queries (EDQ files). The system lists the appropriate queries.

4. Select the query for which to list available column names. The system adds the column names from the selectedquery to the list of available standard column names.

Standard columns, %SS_KEY1%, %SS_KEY2%, %SS_KEY3%, %SS_YEAR%, %SS_FORMAT%, %SS_PERIOD%, %SS_FROMPERIOD%, and %SS_TOPERIOD%, are used for data passed to a sub querywhen executed from a GXL balance or journals drill down. The values for these columns are the values from theoriginal GXL formula, thus mak ing is possible to design an EDQ as the journals sub query drill down. Standard columns, %SPARM01% through %SPARM15%, are used for data passed to a sub query whenexecuted from a query (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD) drill down. The values for these columns are the values from theoriginal formula’s parameters.

5. Manually enter -or- double click the column name to be referenced. The selected column name is inserted into theSub Query Column to Insert field.


6. Click Insert. The selected Sub Query Column to Insert value is inserted into the Sub Query Column field on theParameters panel.

7. Later when drilling down on the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query, select the desired row, rightclick and then from the Sub Query sub menu select the appropriate detail query for which to view results. Thesystem displays the data for the selected detail query.

Query Designer 287


9.9.4 Assign Query

A query may be created for listing valid values for another query parameter on the Build a Template panel in Excel.

1. Create a reporting query (ex. Northwind Orders.edq) and a "lookup" query (ex. Northwind Country Lookup.edq).

2. In the reporting query on the Parameters panel, click the Assign Query down arrow for the appropriate parameterand select the desired "lookup" query. Save the parameter, and save query changes.

3. In Excel on the Build a Template panel when the reporting query is selected, an ellipse button appears for theparameter (ex. Country). Click the ellipse button to execute the "lookup" query.


9.9.5 GEXD Limit

Query Designer allows the user to assign the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula isgenerated. In addition, the GEXD limit may also be assigned as a query parameter, allowing the user the ability tomodify the desired number of records as necessary.

To Assign a GEXD Limit:1. From the Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field specify the maximum number of records to be

output in Excel for the query.

Value of "0" indicates no limit to GEXD records returned in Excel.Positive integer indicates the number of records to be returned by the GEXD formula in Excel.

To Assign GEXD Limit as a Parameter:1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears.

2. On the Add a Parameter panel, enter a description (i.e. GEXDLimit) and a default value for the number of records tobe returned when processing the GEXD, and then click Save. The new parameter is added to the Parameterspanel.

3. From the Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field enter '&SPARMxx' (where xx equals the ID numberassigned to the GEXD limit parameter created in the previous step), and then click Save.

4. When the query is used in Excel, the parameter created above appears allowing the user to specify the desirednumber of records to be returned when the query is generated.

Query Designer 289


9.10 Create a Totals Query

When a query is created, by default it is a detail query -- one in which each record is displayed in the output. Thequery may be modified to become a totals (or group by) query, such that only summarized records are displayed.

To Create a Totals Query:1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and select Totals on the Field List popup menu. The Totals column

appears in on the Field List panel displaying the value "Group By" for each field except calculated fields (whichhave no default).

2. For each field in the list, click the down arrow and select the proper Totals value (see table below) based upon theplanned output for the query.

Totals Value Description

Group By Displays each distinct value once per break point.

Sum Sums the field for each record at the break point.

Avg Averages the field at each break point.

Min Displays the minimum value for the field at each break point.

Max Displays the maximum value for the field at each break point.

Count Counts the records for the field at each break point.

StDev Displays the standard deviation for the field at each break point.

Var Displays the variance for the field at each break point.

First Displays the first value for the field.

Last Displays the last value for the field.

Expression Does not assign a Group By value, but is used for calculated fields where the Group Byvalue has already been assigned in the definition of the field.

Where For "Visible" fields, use when criteria will be applied to the grouped field. This isexpressed in the SQL code as a HAVING statement. For fields that are not "Visible", use when criteria will be applied at a detail record level. This is expressed in the SQL code as a WHERE statement.


Contrast of Detail Output to Totaled Output:

Example 1 - Detail Output (each output record visible):

Example 2 - Totaled Output (one output record per vendor):

Query Designer 291


9.11 Create the GEXQ Field

A GEXQ (summary) field is used to summarize (i.e. total, count, average) a selected numeric field. In Excel a GEXQformula is then used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A usermay then drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results (see GEXQ Formulas).

To Designate a Field as an GEXQ Summary Field:1. On the Field List panel, right click on the desired field. The Field List popup menu appears.

2. On the Field List popup menu, select GEXQ (Summary) Field. The Summary Type panel appears.

3. On the Summary Type panel, select the desired summary type.

Note: If a field is an expression that already contains a summary type (e.g. SUM(RPAAP)), then select theSummary Type as Embedded to avoid syntax like Sum(Sum(....)).

4. Click the Save button. The resulting field will be designated with a symbol in the Field List panel.

5. Defining a field as the GEXQ summary field also creates SQL code that is executed when the GEXQ is run fromExcel. This code is displayed on the SQL Text panel on the GEXQ tab.


9.12 SQL SHELL Function

The SHELL function creates a dynamic cross application functionality with Query Designer. Using the text SHELLwithin the SQL Text panel followed by an external program or file name, adds versatility to the SQL statement bylaunching the external program and/or opening the file or image providing access to additional data. This functionallows the user to process anything which could be processed in the RUN command in Windows. The SHELLstatement may be used as part of a query detail drill down.

Example - SHELL Statement Used to Access a Vendor Voucher in a Word Document:In this example, the query has two parameters, Vendor # and Voucher #, and the Amount Gross field is an GEXQsummary field.

1. In the SQL Text panel, change to manual entry mode (see SQL Text Panel):De-select the Auto Generate check box.Click No to not copy the auto-generated SQL text.

2. Within the SQL Text panel, key the text SHELL, press Enter, and key the additional text required to run thecommand or launch the external program. In this example C:\PO\&PARM02.docx has been keyed, indicating:

C:\PO\ -- The network directory location of the target file.&PARM02 -- The Voucher # parameter defined in Query Designer and used in Excel cell reference..docx -- The file extension of the target file.

3. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query.

4. In Excel, add the GEXQ formula. Use cell references for the parameters (see GEXQ Formulas).

5. To execute the SHELL statement, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then right click and selectSpreadsheet Server>Drill Down -or- select the menu, toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see SServer Menu, SS Toolbar orSS Ribbon). The SHELL statement is executed (opens the Microsoft® Word document C:\PO\12324.docx in thisexample).

Query Designer 293


9.13 Execute Query

Once all fields have been selected and added to the Field List panel, it is suggested to run a quick test to verify thequery setup.

To Execute a Query:1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record -or- Home>1,000 Records. The ResultsContainer

panel appears displaying query results for either a single record or the first 1,000 records in the file based upon theoption selected.

Note: A similar panel is also displayed when a drill down is performed on a GEXQ or GEXI formula in Excel (seeGEXQ Formula or GEXI Formula).

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.


9.14 Legacy Ad Hoc Queries

Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, users had the ability to create ad hoc queries in Query Designer which enabledthe user to drill down from the results view of a query to detail data associated with another query. As of V14R1M1,this feature is being replaced with the sub query processing (see Sub Query Column). The Legacy Ad Hoc Queriesfunction displays preexisting ad hoc queries, allowing the user to determine which current queries need to be modified(assigned Sub Query Column criteria). Contact Global for assistance in updating existing queries to utilize sub queryprocessing.

To Access Legacy Ad Hoc Queries:1. Close all queries.

2. From the Ribbon, select View>Legacy Ad Hoc Queries. The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel appears.

Query Designer 295


9.15 Query Management

Once a query has been created, various functions are available to maintain, clone, delete or lock/unlock a query.

To Modify a Query Description:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Change Description. The Description

panel appears. 2. On the Description panel, key the desired description.3. Click OK.

To Clone a Query:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Clone from the

File System tab on the ribbon (see Ribbon Menu). The Clone Query panel appears. 2. On the Clone Query panel, enter a query name for the clone.3. Click OK. The new query appears in the list of available queries.

To Delete a Query:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Delete from the

File System tab on the ribbon (see Ribbon Menu). The Delete File panel appears. 2. Click Yes. The query is removed from the list of available queries.

To Lock a Query:1. Open the desired query. 2. From the Ribbon select Home>Un-Locked. The Lock Query panel appears. 3. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. 4. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password to be used to protect the query.5. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the query is locked.

To Unlock a Query:1. Open the desired query. 2. From the Ribbon select Home>Locked. The Unlock panel appears. 3. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. 4. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password previously assigned to lock the query.5. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the lock has been removed for the query.


9.15.1 Download or Publish Query Exchange Queries

Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online querydepository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. In addition, a QueryDesigner user may publish an existing query to Query Exchange. A user's ability to access Query Exchange isdetermined by a user setting in the Configurator.

Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component.

To Download a Query from Query Exchange:1. From within Query Designer:

In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens.

From within Excel:In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ,GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab.

Click the Search Online button ( ). Query Exchange opens.

2. Continue with step 2 in the Download Queries from Query Exchange section.

To Publish a Query to Query Exchange:1. In Query Designer, open the desired query to be published.

2. From the Ribbon, select Home>Publish. The query is published to Query Exchange. Global reviews all publishedqueries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange.

Note: If a description does not exist for the selected query, a prompt panel appears requiring the user to enter a query description.

Query Designer 297


9.15.2 Textual Query Definition

Use the Textual Query Definition function is as a convenient way to document queries.

1. Open the query.

2. From the Ribbon, select Home>Definition. Windows Notepad opens displaying the query definition.

Sample Textual Query Definition:

Query Name: AP Open InvoicesQuery File Name: P:\E-Dash\GSI Queries\AP Open Invoices.edq

Tables/Files in query:

Table: F0411 (ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER)

Table: F0101 (ADDRESS BOOK MASTER)

Relationships:

Inner Join F0411. RPAN8 = F0101. ABAN8

Selected Fields:

F0411 . RPAN8 Alias: "Vendor #" Sort= Ascending Visible=TrueF0101 . ABALPH Alias: "Vendor Name" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPDOC Alias: "Voucher #" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPAG Alias: "AmountGross" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPAAP Alias: "AmountOpen" Sort= (none) Visible=True

Calculated Field: "AmountRemaining"&lib.F0411.RPAG/100 - &lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 Alias: "AmountRemaining" Sort= none)

Visible=True

Calculated Field: "Invoice Date"CASE WHEN &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ + 1900000,7,0)) ) END Alias: "Invoice Date" Sort= (none) Visible=True

F0411 . RPDIVJ Alias: "Invoice Date Julian" Sort= (none) Visible=False

Parameters Description ValuePARM01 Vendor # 459

Criteria:

F0411 . RPAN8 &SPARM01

F0411 . RPAAP <>0

F0411 . RPDIVJ <>0


Summarize (GEXQ): RPAAP

Detail SQL (AUTO): SELECT &lib.F0411.RPAN8 AS "Vendor #", &lib.F0101.ABALPH AS "Vendor Name",&lib.F0411.RPDOC AS "Voucher #", &lib.F0411.RPAG/100 AS "AmountGross",&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 AS "AmountOpen", &lib.F0411.RPAG/100 - &lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 AS"AmountRemaining", CASE WHEN &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ + 1900000,7,0)) ) END AS "Invoice Date"FROM ((&lib.F0411 INNER JOIN &lib.F0101 ON (&lib.F0411.RPAN8=&lib.F0101.ABAN8)))WHERE (((&lib.F0411.RPAN8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100)<>0) AND((&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ)<>0) ) ORDER BY "Vendor #"GEXQ SQL (AUTO): SELECT SUM(&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100) as GEXQFROM ((&lib.F0411 INNER JOIN &lib.F0101 ON (&lib.F0411.RPAN8=&lib.F0101.ABAN8)))WHERE (((&lib.F0411.RPAN8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100)<>0) AND((&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ)<>0) )

Query Designer 299


9.16 QD View Log

During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the QD Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected,then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select View>View Log File. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying thelevel, date, time and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displaysa count of the number of entries listed.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the QD Settings panel (see QDSettings).

2. See SS View Log for additional information regarding the View Log function.


10 Distribution Manager

10.1 DM Navigation

Distribution Manager uses the following navigation methods for processing functions within Excel. Each function is notalways available from each method.

DistMgr Menu (see DistMgr Menu)Distribution Manager Toolbar (see DM Toolbar)Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon)

NAVIGATION TIPS:Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various pathsavailable to access a function.

Distribution Manager 301


10.1.1 DistMgr Menu

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, the DistMgr menu is added to Excel. TheDistMgr menu is used to access/process various functions in the application.

Note: For Excel 2003, the DistMgr menu is accessible from the Excel menu bar. For Excel 2007 (and above), the DistMgr menu is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon.


About Distribution Manager Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - About panel, displaying companyand product information, and allowing the user access to online manuals.

Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user todefine various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewerpanel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selectedlog entries, email or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log).

Create New DistributionControl Worksheet

Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution ControlWorksheet).

Distribute All Distributes all specifications within the workbook (see DistributeSpecifications).


10.1.2 DM Toolbar

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Distribution Manager (DM) toolbar is addedto Excel. The DM toolbar may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process various functions in theapplication.

Note: For Excel 2003, the DM toolbar is accessible in the standard toolbar section. For Excel 2007 (and above), the DM toolbar is accessible from the Add-Ins ribbon.


Distribute AllDistributes all specifications within the workbook (see DistributeSpecifications).

DM SettingsOpens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user todefine various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewerpanel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selectedlog entries, email or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log).

Maintain DM SpecsOpens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/ormaintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and MaintainSpecification Rows).



10.1.3 DM Ribbon

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon isadded for Excel 2007 (and above). The SS ribbon may be used as a convenient alternative to access/process variousfunctions in the application.

Note: For Excel 2003, the SS ribbon is NOT applicable. If the SS ribbon does not appear, go to SS Settings and click the Add Excel Ribbon button (see SS Settings).


Distribute Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Click the arrow to accessadditional functions (see Distribute Specifications).

All Distributes all specifications within the workbook.

Selected Distributes only selected specifications.

Clone Sheet Creates a copy of the current worksheet, leaving all formulas intact.

Clone Sheet as Values Creates a copy of the current worksheet, converting all formulas to values.

New Control Sheet Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution ControlWorksheet).

Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/ormaintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and MaintainSpecification Rows).

Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings - General panel, allowing the user todefine various criteria to control processing and to access the Log Viewerpanel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selectedlog entries, email or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log).


10.2 DM Settings

Distribution Manager (DM) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing.

1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DMRibbon).


Field Description

General Options:

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see DM View Log).Nav Tip: Use the View Log button to display, email or clear the log file.

Always Save Workbook Priorto Distribution

If selected, all workbook changes are automatically saved prior todistribution.



Field Description

Consolidate Emails If selected, multiple specification rows for a recipient in a distribution runare combined into a single email with multiple attachments (one for eachspecification row). Otherwise, one email is issued per specification row.

Include Members When Onlythe Master is Selected

If selected and only the group master specification row is selected fordistribution, the system distributes the master and all member rows (as ifthe master and all member rows were individually selected). Otherwise,only selected specification rows are distributed.

Right Justify Text Fields If selected, all text fields are right justified.

Use "Microsoft Save as PDF"for PDF Creation

If selected, Excel 2007 (and above) functionality is used to convertworkbooks to PDFs (overriding the value in the PDF Printer Name field).Note: For Excel 2007 users, the 2007 Microsoft Office Add-In MicrosoftSave as PDF or XPS must be downloaded to the user's PC to utilize thisfeature.

PDF Printer Name If the Use "Microsoft Save as PDF" for PDF Creation option is notselected, then key the path or use the Browse button to select the printerto be used to convert objects to PDF. If blank, the system uses theAdobe PDF printer (if it exists), else it uses the default printer. Note: When using Adobe, the Adobe Distiller product is required toconvert a document to a PDF file. The Distiller is not available for thoseusers with only the Adobe Reader installed.

Convert Formulas to ValuesDefault:

Specify the option to default for the Convert Formulas to Value field whenadding a new distribution specification row.

Button Description

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and errorlog entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see DMView Log).


3. Use the table to enter data on the Email panel.

Field Description

Email Options:

Email Server Specify the email server to be used for email distributions. When SMTP isselected, additional setting options become available for input. Note: For Excel 2007 users, Collaboration Data Objects (CDO) must beinstalled for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. Whenapplicable, a link is available to install the component.Note: For Excel 2010 (or above) users, Distributor Outlook Add-In mustbe installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component with theability to Run as Administrator if necessary. Note: When using SMTP certain mail configurations may prevent thetransmission of messages. Contact your IT department for assistance.

HTML Email When using email server options Outlook 2010 (or above) or SMTP, ifselected HTML email editor is used for the email body contents. Otherwise, plain text editor is utilized.



Field Description

Cache Address Book For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook orSMTP, if selected the address book is cached to prevent long waits whenloading the address book. Note: When cached lists exist and the user deselects the option, a promptappears ask ing if the lists should be deleted.

SMTP Options: When the SMTP email server option is selected the following options areavailable for input:

SMTP Mail Server Specify the SMTP mail server to be used for email distributions.

SMTP Sent "From" Address Specify the "from" email address to be assigned to email distributions.

SMTP Advanced Options(Optional):

When the SMTP email server option is selected, if necessary, specifyoptional settings for the authentication account name and password, theSMTP port number, and SSL (secured socket layer) support.

4. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel.


10.3 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet

The columns on a distribution control worksheet are predefined by Global and should not be changed. However, therows defined on a distribution control worksheet will depend upon an organization's reporting requirements.

Note: The examples in this documentation are meant only to demonstrate the capabilities of the product.

1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Create New Distribution Control Worksheet -or- select the ribbon equivalent(see DM Ribbon). The Create a New Distribution Control Worksheet panel appears.

2. Enter the New Worksheet name, and click Create. The Maintain Specifications panel appears.



3. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - General tab.

Field Description

Destination:

Type Click the down arrow and select the destination type for the distribution. Validtypes are Email, File Save, Group (member specification row that distributesonly to the group master), and Print. Note: When printing the system prints to the user's default printer.

Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distribution. The name must be uniquefor each specification row. If left blank, the current workbook name is used. Ifleft blank on multiple specification rows, the current workbook name and anappended sequence number is used. This option does not apply whenDestination Type = Group.

File Type Click the down arrow and select the file type for the distribution. Valid typesare Excel, Excel (xlsx), Excel (xlsm), Excel (xls), HTML, PDF, and None (donot distribute any sheets from the workbook). When the type Excel isselected, the system assigns the current workbook type. This option does notapply when Destination Type = Group.Note: Excel (xlsx) and (xlsm) file types only apply to Excel 2007 (and above)users.

Folder When Destination Type = File Save, key the path or use the Browse button toselect the folder location where the document will be saved. The destinationlocation must be different than the source location. This option does not applywhen Destination Type = Email, Group or Print. See the example below.

Modify Cells: This section indicates the worksheet cells to receive designated values. To add cell parameters, click the down arrow and select the worksheet,enter the cell and value information, and then click the Add button. Theparameters are displayed in the window below.To modify cell parameters, select the line in the window, and make theappropriate change(s).To remove a cell parameter, select the line in the window, and click theRemove button.To clear all parameter lines, click the Clear button.

Example: For worksheet Income Statement, cell H4 will contain the value 5(reporting period), and cell H6 will contain the value 00060 (reporting company).


Field Description

Worksheet Specify the worksheet to receive the data.

Cell Specify the cell to receive the data.

Value Specify the value to be placed in the defined cell.

Specify Worksheets: This section indicates the worksheets and chart objects from the activeworkbook to be included in the distribution. If blank, then all worksheets in theworkbook will be distributed. When Destination Type = HTML, at least oneworksheet must be specified.

To select a worksheet, click the down arrow and select the desiredworksheet, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Addbutton. The selected worksheet displays in the window below.To select all worksheets, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and thenclick the Add All button. All worksheets appear in the window below.To remove a worksheet, select the worksheet in the window, and click theRemove button.To clear all worksheets, click the Clear button.To control the order of worksheets in the distributed workbook, select theworksheet in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move theselected worksheet up or down in the list.

Example: The Income Statement and Expanded Report worksheets have beenselected, the target sheet names have been assigned and the hide zero linesoption has been selected for both worksheets.

Hide Zero Lines Default Specify the default value to be assigned when a worksheet is added to theselection. When no worksheets are selected, this option determines whetheror not to hide zero lines for all distributed worksheets.

Worksheet Specify the worksheet to be distributed.

Target Sheet Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distributed worksheet. The name maybe hard coded, a cell reference or merge data.Note: When using cell reference, syntax should begin with "=" (i.e."=Sheet2!A3"). The "=" is not required when using merge data syntax (see Merge Data).

Hide Zero Lines If selected, worksheet rows with zero values are hidden. This option onlyapplies to rows with Global formulas.

Protect Sheet If selected, the worksheet is protected during the distribution process.Note: The password to be used to unprotect the sheet is defined on theMaintain Specifications - Misc tab.



Field Description

Convert Formulas toValues:

Click the down arrow and specify which formulas, if any, should be convertedto values. Valid options are Global Only (formulas created from SpreadsheetServer), All Formulas (all formulas on the worksheet), None (no conversion),and Global Only (Excel2000) (for Excel 2000 users only).

Recalculate BeforeSending:

Specify whether or not to recalculate the worksheet(s), or to clear andrecalculate PC cache before distributing.Note: If using DM to modify a cell, the worksheet is always recalculatedregardless of the Recalculate Before Sending option selected.

Generate GXEs If selected, all GXE formulas (Spreadsheet Server) are generated prior todistribution.

Generate GEXDs If selected, all GEXD (Spreadsheet Server) formulas are generated prior todistribution.

Zip Destination If selected, the workbook is zipped prior to distribution. This option does notapply when Destination Type = Group or Print.

SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications.

Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on theDistribution Control sheet.

Insert After ActiveRow

If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current activerow on the Distribution Control sheet.

Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel.

Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.


4. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Email tab.

Note: The Email tab is only available when Destination Type = Email.

Field Description

To Specify the email address(es) or when applicable click the To button to selectthe email address(es) to which to distribute the associated document. Multipleaddresses should be separated by a semicolon (;) or comma (,) depending onthe email server type. Note: The DM Settings' Consolidate Emails option controls whether a recipientincluded on multiple specification rows in a distribution run receives one emailwith multiple attachments or one email per specification row (see DM Settings).

Subject Specify the subject line for the email.

Body Specify the body text for the email. Generally a plain text editor is utilized;however, HTML editor offering various editing options (i.e. fonts, tables, insertpictures, etc.) may be available (see DM Settings).



5. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Grouping tab.

Note: Grouping is used to combine multiple specification rows' specified worksheet(s) into a single workbook fordistribution purposes. Refer to the example given on the panel.

Field Description

Group Master SPEC If selected, the specification row is a group master. When pushed to theDistribution Control worksheet, the value [GROUP SPEC #n] (where n is asystem generated number) is assigned in the SPEC Group Control column. Note: Multiple group masters may be defined per workbook.

Member of Group Click the down arrow and select the destination name of the group master towhich the specification row is a group member. When pushed to theDistribution Control worksheet, the system assigns the number associatedwith the group master in the SPEC Group Control column.


6. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab.

Field Description

Protection Passwords:

Open Workbook Specify the password, if necessary, required to open the distributed workbook.

Modify Workbook Specify the password, if necessary, required to modify the distributedworkbook.

Protect Sheet Specify the password, if necessary, required to unprotect sheets in theworkbook which were protected during the distribution process.

Workbook Macros:

Beginning (Prior toProcessing)

Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed prior to distribution.

Middle (Default) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed during distribution.

Ending (After Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed after distribution.



Field Description

Additional Attachments: This section indicates additional documents to attach during the distributionprocess.

To select a document, click the Add button, then browse and select thedesired document.To remove an attachment, select the attachment in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To clear all attachments, click the Clear button.

Note: Attachments do not distribute when Destination Type = Print.

Attachment Displays the name and location of the item to be sent as an attachment to thedistribution.

Merge Document RangeName

Specify the range name from which to pull refreshed data elements into theassociated attachment (see Merge Data).

7. Once all data has been properly entered, use the table to select the appropriate row to be updated.

Field Description

SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications.

Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on theDistribution Control sheet.

Insert After ActiveRow

If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current activerow on the Distribution Control sheet.

Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel.

Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.

8. Click the Push button to replace or insert the specifications on the Distribution Control worksheet.

9. Repeat steps 3 - 8 as necessary to create additional specification rows.

10. Click the Quit button. The Distribution Control worksheet appears.

11. Save the workbook.


10.4 Add Specification Rows

Additional specification rows may be added to an existing Distribution Control worksheet by creating a new row orcopying an existing row.

To Add a New Specification Row:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select a blank row, right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain

Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specificationspanel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section.

To Copy an Existing Row to Create a New Specification Row:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be copied, right click and select

Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specifications panel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row,ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.

3. To copy an additional existing row to create a new row:On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be copied. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. Thespecifications from the current active row will default on the panel.Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row,ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.



10.5 Maintain Specification Rows

Existing specification rows may be maintained by accessing the Maintain Specifications panel or by manually typingchanges on the Distribution Control worksheet.

To Maintain an Existing Row Via the Maintain Specifications Panel:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be maintained, right click and select

Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DM Ribbon). The Maintain Specifications panel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification

row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To maintain an additional existing row:

On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be maintained.On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. Thespecifications from the current active row will default on the panel.Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existingspecification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected.

To Maintain an Existing Row Manually:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired cell to be modified, and click on the down arrow to

change data in the cell -or- type the desired information into the cell.

Note: To avoid errors, it is recommended to use the Maintain Specifications panel (see above) for mak ing changesinstead of typing the desired information into the cell.

2. Save the workbook.


10.6 Distribute Specifications

Distribution specifications for a workbook may be distributed all at the same time or individually selected specificationsmay be distributed at the same time.

Note:If the DM Settings option Always Save Prior to Distribution is not selected, it is imperative to save the workbookprior to distributing specifications.Outlook must be open prior to distributing emails via Outlook.

To Distribute All Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Distribute All -or- select the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar orDM Ribbon). During the distribution process, a panel briefly appears displaying the various procedures beingprocessed. This panel disappears when the distribution process is complete.

To Distribute Individual Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. Select the desired specification row(s) to be distributed: To select a single specification -- select the desired specification row.To select multiple specifications -- press and hold the Ctrl key as specifications rows are selected. To select multiple specifications in a range -- select the first specification row in the range and drag the mouse toselect additional desired rows in the range.

3. After the desired specification row(s) are selected, right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). During the distribution process, a panel briefly appearsdisplaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process iscomplete.

To Distribute Group Master and All Member Specifications Using Single Row Selection:1. Access the DM Settings panel, select the Include Members When Only Master Selected option and click OK.

2. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

3. Select the desired group master specification row to be distributed, right click and select DistributionManager>Distribute Selected -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). The system distributes the groupmaster and all member specification rows.

To Distribute Group Master and Selected Member Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. Select the desired group master and member specification rows to be distributed, right click and select DistributionManager>Distribute Selected -or- select the ribbon equivalent (see DM Ribbon). The system distributes the groupmaster and selected member specification rows.



10.7 Miscellaneous DM Items

10.7.1 Merge Data

Distribution Manager allows the user to add merge fields (place holders for data) in various specification fields, and thenreplace the merge fields with values during the distribution process. In addition, these merge fields may be used toupdate associated fields within an attached document. See below for one example of how this feature may be set upand utilized.

Syntax: {'sheetname'!cellreference}

Setup 1: Define merge fields within the spreadsheet, and assign a range name.

Setup 2: Use Modify Cells to replace word merge data, and specify merge data in part of target sheet name. Ifdesired, specify merge data within the Destination Name and Target Sheet Name fields.


Setup 3: Specify merge data within the email To, Subject and Body fields.

Setup 4: Add an attachment and assign the range name from which to retrieve values.

Results: The system modifies cells and replaces text within the curly brackets { } with the actual values from the cells. In addition, the destination name is automatically added as a prefix to the distributed merge data attachment and thedata in the merge range is merged into the attachment.



10.7.2 Cache Address Book

For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user tocache a local copy of a selected email list to prevent long waits when loading the address book. Email lists may alsobe cached using the Profile Scheduler (see Address Book Cache).

To Cache a Selected Email List: 1. Select the Cache Address Book option in the DM Settings function (see DM Settings).

2. From the Email Lists drop down list, select the desired email list to be cached and then click the Cache AddressList button. The selected email list is cached locally on the computer. Subsequently when the email list isaccessed, the system uses the cached list, reducing the load time.

3. Repeat step 2 to select and cached additional email lists -or- to refresh a previously cached address book.

Note: If a cached list was created while using the Outlook email server option and then the email server option waschanged to SMTP, the Outlook cached list would still be available but could not be refreshed since theOutlook email server option is no longer selected.


10.7.3 Local Address List

For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user tocreate a customized local address list. This feature is beneficial when distributions are only for a select group of usersor if the email addresses are not available from any other list. Addresses on the local list may be added, edited anddeleted as necessary.

To Create and Maintain a Local Address List:1. From the Email Lists drop down list, select Distributor (Local).

2. Key the appropriate name and email address (Alias and City are optional fields) and then click the Add button. Repeat to add additional names to the list. If necessary, click the to remove the associated name from the list.



10.7.4 DM View Log

During the distribution process, various logging information is recorded. If the DM Settings option Enhanced Logging isselected, then the system records additional logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. In Excel from the DistMgr menu, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the toolbar or ribbon equivalent (see DM Toolbar or DMRibbon).

2. On the General panel, click View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, action,status, description and workbook for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displaysa count of the number of entries listed.

Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner.

3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and theneither click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on thepopup panel:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last record in the range.

4. To email the entire error log to the help desk, click the Email Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlookemail panel with the error log attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.


5. To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the Workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. Thesystem displays only entries for the selected workbook.

6. To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify thedesired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range.

7. To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The systemdisplays only entries for the selected level(s).

8. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field andclick the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Nextbutton again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value.

9. To clear the error log file, click the Clear Log button.

10. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panelappears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in thelist. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button toreturn to the Log Viewer panel.

11. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.

Profile Scheduler 325


11 Profile Scheduler

The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching theDistribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loadinglocal database files. A user's ability to access the Profile Scheduler, to access the Database Management tab withinProfile Scheduler, and to create, edit, delete and/or run a profile type is determined by parameter settings defined inUser settings in the Configurator.

Note: As Profile Scheduler works with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running profiles various userright assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see ProfileScheduler Overview).

To Access the Profile Scheduler:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Profile Scheduler. The Profile

Scheduler panel appears.

Note: When not using Windows Single Signon, the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.


To Create a New Profile:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab.

2. To add a new profile, from the ribbon select New. The Select Profile Type panel appears.

3. Click the down arrow and select the desired profile type for which to create a new profile, and then click OK. Theappropriate New Profile panel appears.

Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF profile uses <Sign-On>, the user is firstprompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

Use the following links to access specific profile type information:

Address Book Cache Distribution Manager Load Local INF Load Local JDE

To Maintain an Existing Profile:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab.

2. To modify an existing profile, double click the desired profile from the list -or- select the desired profile from the listand then from the ribbon select Edit. The appropriate profile panel appears.

Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE profile uses <Sign-On>, theuser is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

To Run One or More Profiles:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Profiles tab.

2. To run one or more profiles, select the Run check box for the desired profiles from the list, if desired select the HaltOn Error option indicating to stop all processing when an error occurs, and then from the ribbon select Run. Thesystem processes the profiles and updates the Start, Finish and Status fields accordingly.

Note:When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE profile uses <Sign-On>, theuser is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.When running a Distribution Manager profile if the user or connection is not set to auto-signon, then the user isfirst prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.



11.1 Address Book Cache

The Address Book Cache profile type is used to cache the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order toreduce the time required to load the email address book.

To Create/Maintain an Address Book Cache Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Address Book Cache - Profile tab.

Field Description

Profile Name Specify the name of the profile.

Comments If desired, specify comments related to the profile.

General Information:

Cache Global Address List /Cache Outlook Contacts

Specify whether caching the Global Address List or Outlook Contacts. Note: The Outlook option is only available if Global's Outlook Add-Incomponent has been loaded for Excel 2010 (or above) users.

Address Book Cache Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired location forthe Address Book Cache folder.

Button Function

Clear Cache Removes all cached files in the specified Address Book Cache folder.

Address Book Opens the address book used in Distribution Manager.

2. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Profile Task.


11.2 Distribution Manager Profile

The Distribution Manager profile type is used to refresh selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or toschedule the distribution of selected Distribution Manager workbooks.

To Create/Maintain a Distribution Manager Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Profile tab.

Field Description



Select the Workbooks toProcess:

This section indicates the workbooks and/or folder of workbooks to beincluded in the run.

To add workbooks to the profile, specify the default values, click the AddWorkbook(s) button, navigate to and select the desired workbook(s), andthen click the Open button. To add a folder of workbooks to the profile, specify the default values,click the Add Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder,and then click the Open button. To remove a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button. To control the order of worksheets or folders in the list, select the item inthe window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the item upor down in the list.



Field Description

Run If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are processedwhen the profile is run.

Workbook Name Displays the name of the workbook or folder assigned to the profile.

Start Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run prior to refreshing and/or distributing the workbook(s).

Refresh If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are refreshedusing the replacement data on the Range Name Replacement tab duringthe run process (prior to distribution).

Distribution If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are distributedduring the run process.

End Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run after refreshing and/ordistributing the workbook(s).

Run Default Specify the default Run value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the profile.

Refresh Default Specify the default Refresh value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the profile.

Distribution Default Specify the default Distribution value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the profile.

Start Macro Default Specify the default Start Macro value to be assigned when a workbookand/or folder is added to the profile.

End Macro Default Specify the default End Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the profile.

Halt on Error If selected, when running the profile if an error is encountered the systemstops processing the profile. Otherwise, the system continues processingthe next item in the profile list.

Button Function

Run Saves and closes the profile, and then processes all workbooks and/orworkbooks in the folders which are selected to run.


2. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Range Name Replacement tab.

Field Description

Range Name Replacement: This section indicates the ranges in the selected workbooks to be replacedwith designated values.

To display a list of range names in the workbooks assigned to theprofile, click the Refresh button. To modify values, select the line in the window and make the appropriatechange(s).To remove a range from the list, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button. To clear all ranges from the list, click the Clear button.

Range Name Specify the name of the range to be replaced.

Replacement Value Specify the value to be placed in the associated range.

Button Function

Run Saves and closes the profile, and then processes all workbooks and/orworkbooks in the folders which are selected to run.




11.3 Load Local INF

The Load Local INF profile type is used to download account balance information from Infinium into local databasesallowing for optimized calculation speeds.

To Create/Maintain a Load Local INF Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Profile - Load Local tab.

Field Description



Database Location:

Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQLServer or MS Access type database.

SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and selectthe connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list onlydisplays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load localconnections and to which the user is authorized.

Local Database FilesLocation (Local .accdb)

When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browsebutton to select the location for the local database files.

Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or usethe Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded localdatabase files.

Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.


2. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Ledger Selections tab.

Field Description

Library Specify the library from which to retrieve data.

From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year.

To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year.

Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If notspecified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering anaccount mask each segment of the account string must be keyed anddelimited by a dash (i.e. 00060-51-1110-123). Account segments may bea single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list.

To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and clickthe Add button.To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the listand click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user,click the Profile button.

Note: Regardless of the Account Masks defined for loading the localdatabase, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server.

Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s).

Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloadedrecords for only the year and type being processed, to find and replacerecords for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on theLedger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected library.



Field Description

Year and Ledger to Include This list displays the available year(s)/ledger(s) based upon the selectioncriteria entered, and is used to select the desired year(s)/ledger(s) to bedownloaded.

To populate the list, complete all selection criteria above and then clickthe Populate Selection List button. To filter data in the list, enter the desired value in the appropriate columnfilter field.To select year(s), click the associated Include check box. To select all years, click the Select All button. To deselect all selected years, click the Unselect All button.

Records to be Loaded Based upon the selected years/ledgers, the system displays the numberof records to be loaded.



11.4 Load Local JDE

The Load Local JDE profile type is used to download account balance information from JD Edwards into localdatabases allowing for optimized calculation speeds.

To Create/Maintain a Load Local JDE Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Profile - Load Local tab.

Field Description



Database Location:

Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQLServer or MS Access type database.

SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and selectthe connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list onlydisplays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load localconnections and to which the user is authorized.

Local Database FilesLocation (Local .accdb)

When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browsebutton to select the location for the local database files.

Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or usethe Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded localdatabase files.

Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.



2. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Ledger Selections tab.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration from which toretrieve data. The list only displays configurations to which the user isauthorized.Note: When the selected host configuration uses <Sign-On>, the user is prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year.

To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year.

Specific Ledger Types If desired, specify the ledger type(s) for which to retrieve balances. Whenselecting multiple types separate the types by a comma (i.e. AA,BA,CU).

Summarize Balances by CO,BU, OBJ, and SUB

If selected, account balances are summarized when the load is executed.

Use Weekly F0902B forSelections

If selected, account balances are retrieved from the Weekly F0902B file.


Field Description

Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If notspecified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering anaccount mask each segment of the account string must be keyed anddelimited by a dash (i.e. 00060-51-1110-123). Account segments may bea single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list.

To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and clickthe Add button.To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the listand click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user,click the Profile button.

Note: Regardless of the Account Masks defined for loading the localdatabase, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server.

Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s).

Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloadedrecords for only the year and type being processed, to find and replacerecords for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on theLedger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected Configuration.

3. The Load Local JDE - Performance Indexes tab lists the available business unit and object account categorycodes, and allows for the user to select up to a maximum 22 of the most popular category codes used inSpreadsheet Server formulas. The system creates special indexes for the selected category codes, and usesthese indexes to reduce the time required to process spreadsheet calculations.




11.5 Schedule Profile Task

The Schedule tab allows the user to define various options as to when to execute the profile. As Profile Schedulerworks with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running profiles various user right assignments and setup conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview).

Note: Ensure all preceding steps have been completed prior to entering data on the Schedule tab.

To Create/Maintain the Schedule for a Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Schedule tab.

Field Description

Not Scheduled / Scheduled /Run Once

Specify whether or not to schedule the execution of the profile. Appropriate processing fields become input capable based upon the optionselected.

Externally Managed If selected, indicates that the scheduled profile task has been changed viathe Windows Task Scheduler function. When this option is selected,scheduling criteria fields on the panel are disabled. Note: This feature is not applicable in a Windows XP environment.

Start Date Click the down arrow and select the date to start the profile task.

Start Time Click the down arrow and select the time to start the profile task.


Field Description

Daily: Daily is used for multiple daily consecutive profile runs. This optionrequires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specifiednumber of Days or Hours. Note: When using Hours, the system begins with the Start Time and addsthe number of hours up until midnight to create the scheduled tasks.

Weekly: Weekly is used for multiple profile runs for one or more days on aconsecutive number of weeks. This option requires the user to assign aStart Date, Start Time, and Every specified number of Weeks for eachselected Weekday.

Monthly: Monthly is used for multiple profile runs for a specific day of each selectedmonth. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time,the specific week and day of the week for each selected Month -or- Days(specific day of the month). Note: In a Windows XP environment, when using the Days option only oneday may be selected for scheduling the task .

Windows Credentials:

Allow Job to Run While LoggedOff

If selected, the scheduled job may be run while the user is logged off thePC.

User Name Specify the user ID to be used for the scheduled job. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the user name is required whenscheduling a task .

Password Specify the password to be used for the scheduled job. The systemretains the password entered until the Schedule panel is redisplayed. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the password is required whenscheduling a task .



2. If scheduling a profile which contains mapped drives, proceed to the next step Define Mapped Drives.

3. Click OK. The system adds/updates the profile and, if appropriate, adds the job to the Windows Task Scheduler.

Note: When the scheduled date and time are reached, the program reconnects to the host and initiates the task .Scheduled tasks require the PC to be powered on; however, the user does not have to be signed into theoperating system. Scheduled tasks may be altered via Profile Scheduler or Windows Task Scheduler; however, they may only bestopped or deleted via the Task Scheduler. For Windows 7 environments and above, the Task Scheduler mayaccessed from the Profile Scheduler panel by selecting Task Scheduler from the ribbon.


11.6 Define Mapped Drives

The Mapped Drive tab allows the user to define the mapped drives to be created temporarily when a scheduled profile isbeing processed. Mapped drives used in any part of the process, including Distribution Manager and SpreadsheetServer, must be defined.

To Create/Maintain Mapped Drives for a Profile:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Mapped Drive tab.

Field Description

Drive Click the down arrow and select the letter to be assigned to the mappeddrive.

Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired folder locationfor the mapped drive.

2. Click OK. The system adds/updates the profile.



11.7 Miscellaneous PS Items

11.7.1 PS View Log

During the running a profile, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Log tab. The Log panel appears displaying the level, date, time,profile type, profile, action, and description for each log entry.

2. To display the full description of a log entry, select the desired entry in the list. The full description appears at thebottom of the panel.

3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log panel first select the desired record(s) and then from theribbon select Copy Errors:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last record in the range.

4. To email the entire error log to the help desk, from the ribbon select Email Log. The system opens a new Outlookemail panel with the error log attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.

5. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired level(s), containing text, or date/time range in the Filtersections. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. From the ribbon select Clear Filter toreset all filter fields to their default value.


6. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Search For field and then from the ribbonselect Find Next. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Select Find Next again, to find thenext occurrence of the selected value.

7. To clear the log file, from the ribbon select Clear Log.



11.7.2 Database Management

The Database Management tab is used for listing and maintaining tables and indexes for SQL Server load localdatabases, including importing legacy Infinium or JDE load local access databases into SQL Server load localdatabases. In addition, user-specified queries may be run against the database (this feature is password protected). Auser's ability to access the Database Management tab is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings inthe Configurator. Contact Global for more information.



Index- @ -@ field 50, 55, 281

- A -account

balance 18

balance drill down 73, 74

detail journal lines drill down 79

generate audit trail 86

journal drill down 76

journal entry line drill down 78

locate segment 55

multiple columns drill down 75

security 83

segment mapping 185

segment syntax 50

subsystem detail drill down 80

account master

list 82

accounts profile 83

ad hoc drill down 69, 81

ad hoc queries 294

add

fields 259, 260

relationships 257

smart parms 282

tables 255

Add Calculated Field 242, 263

Add Field Descriptions as Aliases 242, 261

Add Smart Parm for This Field 242, 282

add-in

register 9

address book

cache 321

cache profile 327

local address list 322

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) 242, 261

alias field name 261

alias table name 239

Analyst

build a template - GXL 102

GXD 105

GXL 103

sign on 100

assign query 287

audit trail 86

auto generate 247

autosize grid columns 69

average 289

- B -BPCS


GSV 117

GXA 118

GXD 116

GXL 114

load local database 121

sign on 106

BPCS 4.05

settings 107

BPCS 6.02

settings 109

BPCS 6.04

settings 111

build a template

GEXD 202

GEXI 202

GEXQ 202

GEXS 202

GXE 35

GXL 35

GXL - Analyst 102

GXL - BPCS 113

GXL - Data Warehouse 124

GXL - Designer GL 131

GXL - Infinium 136

GXL - Jack Henry 144

GXL - JD Edwards 151

GXL - Lawson 166

GXL - Movex 172

GXL - Oracle 180

GXL - PeopleSoft 189

GXL - SAP 195

GXL using clear/do not clear worksheet 40

GXL using insert column data only 41

GXL using shift worksheet data 42

parameter lookup 287

Index 345


builder

calculated fields 263, 264

CASE builder 268

comments 243

custom buttons 246

date fields 266

get values 275

GEXD row function 273

hard coded criteria 277

panel 243

smart parms 282

- C -cache

global 66

local 65

cache address book 321

calculated fields 263, 264, 266, 268, 273

calculation options 64

disable/enable 68

global cache 66

local cache 65

CASE builder 268

collapse GL row 53

comments syntax 243

components 6

configurator 6

connections 251

update query 252

control panel 18

convert date fields 243, 266

copy grid records 69, 72

count 289

criteria 241, 277, 279

get values 275

custom buttons 243, 246

customize grid layout 69

- D -data validation 85

Data Warehouse


GXD 127

GXL 125

settings 123

sign on 122

database management 343

date fields 266

Delete Field 242

Designer GL


GXL 132

settings 129

sign on 128

disable formula calculations 68

DistMgr menu 301

distribute 318

all 318

group 318

selected 318

Distribution Control worksheet

create 308


Distribution Manager profile 328

distributor (local) email list 322

DM ribbon 303

DM settings 304

DM toolbar 302

DM view log 323

drill down

ad hoc 69, 81

detail journal lines 79

detailed account balances 73

general grid features 69

GXSALES 161

journal entry lines 78

journals 76

multiple column account balances 75

sub queries 69

subsystem detail 80

summarized account balances 74

- E -Edit Calculated Field 242, 263

EDQ files 236

enable formula calculations 68

error log

DM 323

PS 341

QD 299

SS 96

Excel



Excel

GL formulas 34

query formulas 201

expand detail reports

account detail 87, 88

journal detail 91

expand GL row 53

explore 226

Explorer File System panel 236

export grid records 69, 72

expr1 264

expression 289

- F -FASTR report conversion 163

field list 260, 291

builder 243

hard coded criteria 277

menu 242

panel 241

fields 242, 266

add 260

alias name 261

calculated 263, 264, 266, 268, 273

convert dates 243, 266

delete 242

move 242

select/create 259

summary 291

file system 236

filter grid records 69

first 289

fixed asset balances

JD Edwards 162

formula 34, 201, 278

disable/enable calculations 68

GEXD 206, 214

GEXI 206, 227

GEXQ 206, 211

GEXS 206, 223

GSV 117

GXC 43

GXD 43

GXE 43, 87, 88, 91

GXL 43, 49

GXSALES 154, 159

segment syntax 50

SSLDESC 62

upgrade workbook 99

using hierarchy values 61

using segment lists 61

formula assistant 43, 206, 284

GXL - JD Edwards 152

GXSALES - JD Edwards 154

- G -generate account detail 86

get values 275

GEXD 201, 202, 206, 214

row function 273

sample target range 219

sample target table 221

GEXD limit 288

GEXI 201, 202, 206, 227

GEXQ 201, 202, 206, 211

control panel 18

GEXQ (Summary) Field 242, 291

GEXS 201, 202, 206, 223

explore 226

GL reporting 2

global cache 66

grid features 69, 72

group by 241, 289

group grid records 69

GSV 117

GXA

BPCS 118

GXC 34, 43

GXD 34, 43

Analyst 105

BPCS 116

Data Warehouse 127

Infinium 141

Jack Henry 147

JD Edwards 157

Lawson 169

Movex 175

Oracle 184

PeopleSoft 192

SAP 199

GXE 34, 35, 43, 87

account detail 88

journal detail 91

GXL 34, 35, 43, 49

Index 347


GXL 34, 35, 43, 49

Analyst 102, 103

BPCS 113, 114

build a template - clear/do not clear worksheet 40

build a template - insert column data only 41

build a template - shift worksheet data 42

Data Warehouse 124, 125

Designer GL 131, 132

expand/collapse GL row 53

Infinium 136, 138

Jack Henry 144, 145

JD Edwards 151, 152, 155

Lawson 166, 167

list accounts 52

Movex 172, 173

Oracle 180, 182

PeopleSoft 189, 190

SAP 195, 196

using hierarchy values 61

using segment lists 61

GXSALES

drill down 161

JD Edwards 154, 159

- H -hide zero balance rows 94

hierarchy value 50, 55

using in GXL 61

host server

reset connection 95

- I -IN statement 275

Infinium


GXD 141

GXL 138

load local profile 331

settings 135

sign on 134

introduction 1

- J -Jack Henry


GXD 147

GXL 145

settings 143

sign on 142

JD Edwards


FASTR report conversion 163

fixed asset balances 162

formula assistant - GXL 152

formula assistant - GXSALES 154

GXD 157

GXL 155

GXSALES 159

load local profile 334

settings 149

sign on 148

joins 238, 257

journal detail lines drill down 79

journal drill down 76

journal entry line drill down 78

- L -last 289

Lawson


GXD 169

GXL 167

sign on 165

legacy ad hoc queries 294

list accounts

account master 82

in GXL formula 52

segment list 63

load local database

BPCS 121

load local profile

Infinium 331

JD Edwards 334

local address list 322

local cache 65

locate segment 55



Log Viewer

DM 323

PS 341

QD 299

SS 96

- M -manual mode 247, 292

mask 50, 281

max 289

menu 233

DistMgr 301

SServer menu 12

merge data 319

min 289

Move Field 242

Movex


GXD 175

GXL 173

settings 171

sign on 170

- N -navigation 11, 233, 300

DistMgr menu 301

DM ribbon 303

DM toolbar 302

QD ribbon 233

SS ribbon 15

SS toolbar 14

SServer menu 12

- O -optional components 6

Oracle


GXD 184

GXL 182

segment mappping 185

settings 178

sign on 176

overview


GL reporting 2

Profile Scheduler 5

query/Query Designer 3

- P -parameters 278, 279

Excel 278, 284

GEXD limit 288

panel 240

Query Designer 278, 279

smart parms 281, 282

standard 279

PeopleSoft


GXD 192

GXL 190

settings 188

sign on 186

Profile Scheduler 5, 325

address book cache 327

database management 343

distribution manager 328

load local INF 331

load local JDE 334

mapping drives 340

scheduling tasks 337

PS view log 341

- Q -QD ribbon 233

QD settings 248

QD view log 299

query 3, 296

ad hocs 294

add relationships 257

add tables 255

assign lookup 287

clone 237, 295

control panel 18

create 253

definition 297

delete 237, 295

description 237, 295

detail 227

download 230, 296

Index 349


query 3, 296

execute 293

executing 18

lock/unlock 295

publish 296

save 254

select/create fields 259

SmartPak 237

sub query column 285

Query Designer 3, 232

Query Exchange 296

download query 230, 296

publish query 296

Query View panel 238

- R -range 50, 281

register add-in 9

relationships 238, 257

required components 6

reset host server connection 95

re-sort grid columns 69

restore hidden rows 94

results container 293

ribbon

DM 303

QD 233

SS 15

rows

expand/collapse 53

hide/restore 94

- S -SAP


GXD 199

GXL 196

settings 194

sign on 193

security account profile 83

segment lists 50, 281

create/maintain 57

description 62

upgrade 98

using in GXL 61

view values 63

segment mapping 185

segment syntax 50

settings

BPCS 4.05 107

BPCS 6.02 109

BPCS 6.04 111

Data Warehouse 123

Designer GL 129

DM 304

Infinium 135

Jack Henry 143

JD Edwards 149

Movex 171

Oracle 178

PeopleSoft 188

QD 248

SAP 194

SS 22

SHELL function 247, 292

sign on 17

Analyst 100

BPCS 106

Data Warehouse 122

Designer GL 128

enable formula calculations 68

Infinium 134

Jack Henry 142

JD Edwards 148

Lawson 165

Movex 170

Oracle 176

PeopleSoft 186

reset host server connection 95

SAP 193

single value 223, 281

smart parms 223, 282

entry criteria 281

SmartPak 237

sort 241

specification rows 308, 316

add 316

copy 316

maintain 317

SQL text 291, 292

panel 247

SS ribbon 15

SS settings 22



SS toolbar 14

SS validation 85

SS view log 96

SServer menu 12

SSLDESC 34, 62

standard deviation 289

sub queries 69

sub query column 285

subsystem detail drill down 80

sum 289

summary fields 211, 291

syntax

account segments 50

query parameters 281

- T -tables 255

add 238

alias name 239

remove 239

select fields 260, 264

textual 297

toolbar

DM 302

SS 14

totals 241, 242, 289

trim 243, 257

- U -uninstall 10

update query connections 252

upgrade segment list 98

upgrade workbook 99

- V -validation lists 85

value 278, 279

as number 279

as string 279

value list 50, 281

variance 289

view account balances 18

view log

DM 323

PS 341

QD 299

SS 96

- W -where 289

wildcard 50, 281

- Z -zero balance rows

hide/restore 94